You are on page 1of 338

16-9-2014 332

W:\CARASSO\Nissan\OMs\140450 - New Qashqai - J11 Translation\Translated\140450 - New Qashqai - J11 Cover S1 YO.indd

NISSAN QASHQAI
QASHQAI

J11-U

09/2014
OM14E-0J11E0E :

NISSAN QASHQAI
QASHQAI

J11-U


09/2014
OM14E-0J11E0E :
Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle has been delivered to you with confidence. It has been produced using the latest techniques
and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometres (miles) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive
resources available for you.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE


REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! This vehicle should not be modified. Modifications could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for
damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be cov-
you and your passengers!
ered under NISSAN warranties.
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi-
Before driving your vehicle, read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure
tions.
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. operation of your vehicle.
Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:
ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. WARNING
ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information. Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must be
followed precisely.
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-
fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. CAUTION

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-
at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
designs at any time without notice and without obligation. cedures described must be followed carefully.
NOTE
Indicates additional helpful information.
The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and
best practices. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Be sure to read the Airbag warning labels description in the Safety section of
this manual; and the Airbag label description at the end of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING (4WD models)
This vehicle will handle and manoeuvre differently from an ordinary passenger
vehicle, because it has a higher centre of gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-
tures of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be sure to read On-pavement and off-road driving precautions and Four-
This symbol means Do not do this or Do not let this happen. wheel drive (4WD) in the 5. Starting and driving section of this manual.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the
illustration.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
CAUTION
An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:
Vehicle battery
Remote controller battery (for Intelligent Key and/or Remote keyless entry
system)
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor battery
Remote controller battery (for Mobile Entertainment system)
If in doubt, contact your local authority, or a NISSAN dealer, or a qualified work-
shop for advice on disposal.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.


m
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
m
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. The Gracenote logo and logo type, and
m the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Contents Illustrated table of contents 0
Safety Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental
Restraint System 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3


Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and
audio system 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical information 9

Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents

Seat belts and supplemental restraint system ........... 0-2 Left hand drive.................................................... 0-8
Exterior front ............................................................ 0-3 Right hand drive ................................................. 0-9
Exterior rear............................................................. 0-4 Meters and gauges .................................................. 0-10
Passenger compartment .......................................... 0-5 Engine compartment................................................ 0-11
Cockpit ................................................................... 0-6 HRA2DDT engine............................................... 0-12
Left hand drive.................................................... 0-6 MR20DD engine................................................. 0-12
Right hand drive ................................................. 0-7 K9K engine......................................................... 0-13
Instrument and control layout ................................... 0-8 R9M engine........................................................ 0-14
SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

11. Front passenger air bag switch* (P. 1-35)


* where fitted

NPA1244

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-29) 6. Rear outboard seat belts (P. 1-8)
2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags 7. Rear centre seat belt (P. 1-8)
(P. 1-29)
8. ISOFIX child restraint system (P. 1-21)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-8)
9. Rear seats (P. 1-5)
4. Head restraints (P. 1-6) Child restraints (P. 1-15)
5. Supplemental side-impact air bags (P. 1-29) 10. Front seats (P. 1-3)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


EXTERIOR FRONT

7. Outside rear-view mirrors (P. 3-19)


Side turn signal light (P. 2-36, Location and
bulb replacement P. 8-27)
8. Doors (Keys P. 3-2, Door locks P. 3-8,
Remote keyless entry system P. 3-4)
* where fitted

NPA1245

1. Bonnet (P. 3-14) 4. Towing eye (P. 6-16)


2. Windscreen wipers and washers 5. Headlights, front side lights, turn signal lights
Switch operation (P. 2-32) (Switch P. 2-36, Location and bulb replace-
Blade replacement (P. 8-24) ment P. 8-27)
Window washer fluid (P. 8-15)
6. Tyres (Tyres and wheels P. 8-33, P. 9-5, Flat
Windscreen deicer (P. 2-35)
tyre P. 6-3), Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
ThermaClear* (P. 2-34)
(TPMS) P. 6-4)
3. Power windows (P. 2-48)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


EXTERIOR REAR

Door locks (P. 3-8)


Child safety lock (P. 8-11)
8. Fuel filler cap (P. 3-15)
9. Reversing light (P. 8-27)
10. Rear fog light* (P. 8-27)
11. Towing eye (P. 6-16)
12. Rear view camera*
Rear-View Monitor* (P. 4-2)
Around View Monitor* (P. 4-4)
13. Number plate lights (P. 8-27)
14. Back door
Door locks (P. 3-11)
Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-4)
* where fitted

NPA1246

1. Rear window (Defogger switch, P. 2-35) 5. Tail light and brake light
Switch location (P. 2-36)
2. Rear wiper and washer
Bulb replacement (P. 8-27)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)
Wiper replacement (P. 8-24) 6. Rear turn signal light
Washer fluid (P. 8-15) Switch location (P. 2-36)
Bulb replacement (P. 8-27)
3. High-mounted stop light (P. 8-27)
7. Doors
4. Antenna (P. 8-23).
Keys (P. 3-2)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Parcel shelf (P. 2-45)


Luggage floor (P. 2-47)
Luggage hooks (P. 2-47)
9. Fuse box (P. 8-25)
* where fitted

NPA1247

1. Inside rear-view mirror (P. 2-18) Power windows controls (P. 2-48)
Power door lock switch (P. 2-10)
2. Map light (P. 2-50)
6. Interior (room) light (models without fixed glass
3. Sun visors (P. 2-50)
roof)* (P. 2-51)
4. Inside door handle (P. 2-18)
7. Interior (reading) light (models with fixed glass
Outside mirror folding switch* (P. 3-20)
roof)* (P. 2-51)
Outside mirror remote control (P. 3-19)
8. Luggage (boot) compartment
5. Door armrest

Illustrated table of contents 0-5


COCKPIT

Vehicle information display switches


(P. 2-13)
Audio switches* (P. 4-38)
5. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-36)
6. TRIP/RESET/brightness switches
Instrument brightness switch (P. 2-3)
TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer
(P. 2-2)
7. Switch panel
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch* (P. 5-60)
ECO mode switch* (P. 5-65)
Stop/Start System OFF switch* (P. 5-22)
Ultrasonic Parking Sensor switch* (P. 5-45)
Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-39)
2WD/4WD switch* (P. 5-26)
Headlight cleaner switch* (P. 2-40)
8. Fuel filler lid release handle (P. 3-15)
Bonnet release handle (P. 3-14)
9. Front cup holders (P. 2-44)

NPA1268
10. Electric parking brake (P. 3-16)
11. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
LEFT HAND DRIVE Mobile phone integration for 12. Power outlet (P. 2-42)
NissanConnect* *1
1. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32) * where fitted
3. Steering wheel *1 Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
2. Steering wheel switches Electric power steering system (P. 5-57) Owners Manual.
Cruise control* (P. 5-36) Horn (P. 2-41)
Speed limiter* (P. 5-38) Drivers supplemental front-impact air bag
Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio (P. 1-29)
with CD player without navigation (P. 4-39)
4. Steering wheel switches

0-6 Illustrated table of contents


with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *1
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-32)
6. TRIP/RESET/brightness switches
Instrument brightness switch (P. 2-3)
TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer
(P. 2-2)
7. Switch panel
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch* (P. 5-60)
ECO mode switch* (P. 5-65)
Stop/Start System OFF switch* (P. 5-22)
Ultrasonic Parking Sensor switch* (P. 5-45)
Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-39)
2WD/4WD switch (P. 5-26)
8. Fuel filler lid release handle (P. 3-15)
Bonnet release handle (P. 3-14)
9. Front cup holders (P. 2-44)
10. Electric parking brake (P. 3-16)
NPA1248 11. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-42)
RIGHT HAND DRIVE Electric power steering system (P. 5-57)
* where fitted
Horn (P. 2-41)
1. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-36) Drivers supplemental front-impact air bag *1 Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
(P. 1-29) Owners Manual.
2. Steering wheel switches
Vehicle information display switches 4. Steering wheel switches
(P. 2-13) Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
Audio switches* (P. 4-38) Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
3. Steering wheel Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio

Illustrated table of contents 0-7


INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL LAYOUT

Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)


Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *1(P. 4-38)
8. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator lights,
vehicle information display (P. 2-2, P. 2-4,
P. 2-13)
9. Steering wheel switches
Vehicle information display switches
(P. 2-13)
Audio control* (P. 4-38)
10. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-15)
11. Glove box (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*1 Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owners Manual.

NPA1269

LEFT HAND DRIVE 5. Audio system* (P. 4-23)


NissanConnect* *1(P. 4-38)
1. Left and right side vents (P. 4-14) without navigation* (P. 4-24)
2. Front passengers supplemental front-impact 6. Ignition switch (behind steering wheel)
air bag (P. 1-30) (P. 5-11)
3. Centre vents (P. 4-14) Push Button ignition switch* (P. 5-12)
4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 7. Steering wheel switches
Cruise control* (P. 5-36)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents


(P. 2-13)
Audio control* (P. 4-38)
8. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator lights,
vehicle information display (P. 2-2, P. 2-4,
P. 2-13)
9. Steering wheel switches*
Cruise control* (P. 5-36)
Speed limiter* (P. 5-38)
Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
with CD player without navigation* (P. 4-39)
Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *1(P. 4-38)
10. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-15)
11. Glove box (P. 2-42)
* where fitted
*1 Refer to the separately provided NissanConnect
Owners Manual.

NPA1249

RIGHT HAND DRIVE 5. Audio system* (P. 4-23)


NissanConnect* *1(P. 4-38)
1. Left and right side vents (P. 4-14) without navigation* (P. 4-24)
2. Front passengers supplemental front-impact 6. Ignition switch (behind steering wheel)
air bag (P. 1-30) (P. 5-11)
3. Centre vents (P. 4-14) Push Button ignition switch* (P. 5-12)
4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 7. Steering wheel switches
Vehicle information display switches

Illustrated table of contents 0-9


METERS AND GAUGES

NPA1250

1. Tachometer (P. 2-2),


Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-4)
2. Vehicle information display (P. 2-13)
3. Speedometer (P. 2-2)
Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-4)
4. Fuel gauge (P. 2-2)
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 2-3)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

HRA2DDT ENGINE
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2. Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7. Battery (P. 8-16)
8. Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9. Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)

NPA1285

Illustrated table of contents 0-11


MR20DD ENGINE
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2. Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7. Battery (P. 8-16)
8. Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9. Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)

NPA1286

0-12 Illustrated table of contents


K9K ENGINE
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2. Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), (P. 8-14)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
5. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), (P. 8-14)
6. Battery (P. 8-16)
7. Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
8. Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)

NPA1283

Illustrated table of contents 0-13


R9M ENGINE
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)
2. Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (RHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (RHD) models) (P. 8-14)
4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir (MT (LHD)
models), Brake fluid reservoir (XTRONIC
transmission (LHD) models) (P. 8-14)
7. Battery (P. 8-16)
8. Air cleaner filter (P. 8-23)
9. Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-25)

NPA1284

0-14 Illustrated table of contents


1 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system

Seats....................................................................... 1-2 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................. 1-13


Front seats ......................................................... 1-3 Child safety ............................................................. 1-14
Seat heater (where fitted) ................................... 1-4 Infants ................................................................ 1-14
Rear seats .......................................................... 1-5 Small children..................................................... 1-14
Armrests (where fitted) ....................................... 1-5 Larger children ................................................... 1-15
Head restraints ........................................................ 1-6 Legal requirements ............................................. 1-15
Adjustable head restraint components................. 1-6 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-15
Non-adjustable head restraint components.......... 1-6 Precautions on child restraints ............................ 1-15
Remove .............................................................. 1-7 Child restraint and ISOFIX information................ 1-16
Install.................................................................. 1-7 ISOFIX child restraint system.............................. 1-21
Adjust................................................................. 1-7 Child restraint anchorage.................................... 1-22
Seat belts ................................................................ 1-8 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX .............. 1-23
Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-8 Child restraint installation using three-point
Child safety ........................................................ 1-9 type seat belt ...................................................... 1-25
Pregnant women ................................................ 1-10 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-29
Injured persons................................................... 1-10 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint
Seat belt warnings .............................................. 1-10 System (SRS)..................................................... 1-29
Three-point type seat belt.................................... 1-11 Supplemental air bag systems ............................ 1-33
Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-12 Repair and replacement procedure ..................... 1-37
SEATS

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area


or on the rear seat when it is in the folded-
down position. Use of these areas by passen-
gers without proper restraints could result in
serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to
contact any moving parts to avoid possible inju-
ries and/or damage.
SSS0133Z
Sit upright and well back

The seatback should not be reclined any more


WARNING than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most
effective when the passenger sits well back
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
and upright in the seat. If the seatback is re-
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
The shoulder belt will not be against your clined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
body. In an accident, you could be thrown into and being injured is increased.
it and receive neck or other serious injuries. When returning the seatbacks to the upright
You could also slide under the lap belt and position, be certain that they are completely
receive serious internal injuries. secured in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be in-
For the most effective protection when the
jured in an accident or sudden stop. When
vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-
right. Always sit well back in the seat with operating the seatback release always rock
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat prop- the seatback afterward to check that it is
erly. See Precautions on seat belt usage locked.
later in this section. When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo,
properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving.
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
The seat may move suddenly and could cause
loss of control of the vehicle. higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to sonal injury.
make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


NPA1252

FRONT SEATS pants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the
vehicle is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) posi-
Manual seat adjustment tion with the parking brake applied.
Forward and backward: Seat lifter (where fitted):
Pull the lever j
1 up and hold it while sliding the seat Repeatedly pull up or push down the adjusting lever
forward or backward to the preferred position. Re- j
3 , to adjust the seat height to the desired position.
lease the lever to lock the seat in position.
Head restraints:
Reclining:
Push and hold the lock knob j 4 to remove, install,
To recline the seatback pull and hold the lever j 2 or (where possible) adjust the head restraints. For
up, keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean back. To proper adjustment see Head restraints later in this
bring the seatback forward pull and hold the lever section.
up, keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean forward.
Keep the lever fully lifted whilst adjusting the seat- Lumbar support (where fitted):
back. Release the lever when the seatback is statio- The lumbar support feature provides lower back
nery and in the desired recline position. support to the driver. Move the adjusting lever j
5
forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seat-
until the desired position is achieved.
back for occupants of different sizes for added com-
fort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit, see Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage later in this section.
Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occu-

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


SEAT HEATER (where fitted)

NPA1253

SIC2770Z

Power seat adjustment (where fitted) Forward and backward:


Move the adjusting switch j
1 forward or backward CAUTION
WARNING to the desired position. With the ignition switch in the ON position,
Never leave children or adults who would nor- Reclining: the battery could run down if the seat heater
is operated while the engine is not running.
mally require the support of others alone in the Move the adjusting switch j
2 forward or backward
vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They
could unknowingly activate switches or controls
to the desired position. Avoid using the seat heater for any longer than
is necessary, or when the seat is not occu-
and inadvertently become involved in a serious The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
pied.
accident and injure themselves. seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
Operating tips:
obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See Precautions on Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
seat belt usage later in this section.) lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
The power seat motor has an auto-reset over-
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
load protection circuit. If the motor stops during overheated.
rest when the vehicle is parked.
the seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then reac-
tivate the switch. Seat lifter (where fitted): Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
To avoid discharge of the battery, do not operate Pull the adjusting switch j 1 up or push down to This may result in damage to the seat heater.
the power seats for a long period of time when adjust the seat height until the desired position is
the engine is not running. achieved. Any liquid spilled on the seat should be re-
moved immediately with a dry cloth.
When cleaning the seat, never use petrol, thin-
ner, or any similar materials.

1-4 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


If any malfunctions are found or the seat does REAR SEATS CAUTION
not operate, turn the switch off and have the
Always ensure that the seat belt is not trapped in
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
the release lever or any other vehicle part.
fied workshop.
ARMRESTS (where fitted)
Heated seats
The seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. The
switches are located on the centre console (for front
seats) and can be operated independently of each
other.
1. Start the engine. NPA1293

2. Select heat range.


For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the Folding
switch j1.
The luggage compartment loading capacity can be NPA1289

For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the increased by folding the rear seats forward.
switch j2. To fold the seat: 1. Front armrest j
A
The indicator light j
3 will illuminate when low 1. Ensure head restraints are properly stowed, see The console box lid can be used as an armrest.
or high is selected. Head restraints later in this section. 2. Rear armrest j
B
3. To turn off the heater push the HI or LO side 2. Release the seatback lock by pressing the latch.
to return the switch to the level position. On the rear seat, pull the top of the armrest and
3. Fold the seat forward. lay it horizontally.
Make sure the indicator light turns off.
To return the seat to an upright position:
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto-
matically turning the heater on and off. The indi- 1. Make sure the seat belts are clear of the seat
cator light will remain on as long as the switch is latch mechanism.
on. 2. Lift the seatback up and push firmly to lock.
When the vehicles interior is warmed, or before 3. If the red marker is visible then the seat has not
you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the latched properly release and then re-latch the
switch. seat.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5


HEAD RESTRAINTS

If your ear position is still higher than the rec- NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING ommended alignment, place the head COMPONENTS
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle restraint at the highest position.
safety systems. They may provide additional pro- For the non-adjustable type, raise into lock-
tection against injury in certain rear end colli- ing position before use. The seat should not
sions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as be occupied with the head restraint in the
specified in this section. Check the adjustment lower storage position.
after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or remove If the head restraint has been removed, ensure
the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the that it is reinstalled and locked in place before
head restraint has been removed. If the head riding in that designated seating position.
restraint was removed, reinstall and properly ad- ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
just the head restraint before an occupant uses NPA1315

the seating position. Failure to follow these in-


COMPONENTS
structions can reduce the effectiveness of the 1. Removable head restraint
head restraints. This may increase the risk of se-
rious injury or death in a collision. 2. Single notch

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints. 3. Lock knob


On the front seats they are adjustable. On the 4. Stalks
rear seats, where fitted, they are non-adjustable
but have a lower storage position.
Adjustable head restraints have multiple notches
along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjust- NPA1314
ment position.
The non-adjustable head restraints have a single 1. Removable head restraint
locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
2. Multiple notches
Proper Adjustment:
3. Lock knob
For the adjustable type, align the head re-
straint so the centre of your ear is approxi- 4. Stalks
mately level with the centre of the head re-
straint.

1-6 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


REMOVE INSTALL ADJUST

NPA1316 NPA1317 SSS0997Z

Use the following procedure to remove the head 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in For adjustable front head restraint
restraint. the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is fac-
Adjust the head restraint so the centre is level with
ing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. the centre of your ears. If your ear position is still
justment notch j 1 must be installed in the hole
higher than the recommended alignment, place the
2. Push and hold the lock knob. with the lock knob j2.
head restraint at the highest position.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head
For non-adjustable head restraint
restraint down.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the
place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an oc-
lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in
cupant uses the seating position.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint that designated seating position.
before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7


SEAT BELTS

Raise PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT WARNING


USAGE Be sure to observe the following warnings when
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, using seat belts. Failure to do so could increase
and you are sitting upright and well back in your the chance and/or severity of injury in an acci-
seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an dent.
accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all Every person who drives or rides in this ve-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-
of your passengers to buckle up every time you
dren should be properly restrained in the rear
drive, regardless of whether or not your seating po-
seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
sition includes a supplemental air bag.
NPA1318 The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a
snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the ef-
fectiveness of the entire restraint system and
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
increase the chance or severity of injury in an
Lower accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.
Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
the belt behind your back, under your arm or
SSS0136Z across your neck. The belt should be away
Sit upright and well back from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low and snug as pos-
sible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A
NPA1319 lap belt worn too high could increase the risk
of internal injuries in an accident.
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the Seatbelts are designed to bear upon the bony
head restraint down. structure of the body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing
SSS0134Z
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi-
Sit upright and well back
nal area must be avoided.

1-8 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


No modifications or additions should be made change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing Care should be taken to avoid contamination
by the user which will either prevent the seat so may affect the operation of the seat belt of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi-
belt adjusting devices from operating to re- system. Modifying or tampering with the seat cals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning
move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly belt system may result in serious personal in- may safely be carried out using mild soap and
from being adjusted to remove slack. jury. water. The belt should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as Once a seat belt pre-tensioner has been acti-
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide vated, it cannot be reused and must be re- CHILD SAFETY
the protection for which they have been de- placed together with the retractor. See a
signed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
protection afforded to the wearer.
Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas- seat belt system components should be done
tened to the proper buckle. by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors
Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. and attaching hardware, should be inspected
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop af-
Do not allow more than one person to use the
ter any collision. NISSAN recommends that
same seat belt.
all seat belt assemblies in use during a colli- SSS0099Z

Never carry more people in the vehicle than sion be replaced unless the collision was mi-
there are seat belts. nor and the belts show no damage and con-
Infants or small children
tinue to operate properly. Seat belt assem-
Each belt assembly must only be used by one
blies not in use during a collision should also NISSAN recommends that infants or small children
occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
be inspected and replaced if either damage should be seated in a child restraint on the rear
a child being carried on the occupants lap.
or improper operation is noted. seats if available. According to accident statistics,
If the seat belt warning light illuminates con-
All child restraints and attaching hardware
children are safer when properly restrained in the
tinuously while the ignition switch is in the ON rear seat than in the front seat. See Child restraints
position, with all doors closed, and all seat should be inspected after any collision. Al-
later in this section. You should choose a child re-
ways follow the restraint manufacturers in-
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction straint system which fits your vehicle and always fol-
spection instructions and replacement rec-
in the system. Have the system checked by a low the manufacturers instructions for installation
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. ommendations. The child restraints should be
and use.
replaced if they are damaged.
No changes should be made to the seat belt
It is essential to replace the entire assembly
system. For example, do not modify the seat
belt, add material, or install devices that may after it has been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not obvious.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9


Children INJURED PERSONS Rear passengers
Children who are too large for child restraints should NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat The rear passenger seat belt warning (where fitted)
be seated and restrained by the seat belts that are belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doc- j1 is shown in the vehicle information display see
provided. tor for specific recommendations. Vehicle information display in the 2. Instruments
and controls section.
The use of a booster seat (commercially available) SEAT BELT WARNINGS
may help to avoid the shoulder belt coming across The seat belt warning alerts the driver and/or front
the face or neck area of a childs seating position. passenger if a (rear) seat belt is not securely fas-
The booster seat should raise the child so that the tened. The seat belt warning shows a filled circle
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low and an empty circle when the related seat belt has
on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicles been securely fastened, or after approximately 35
seat. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt seconds after engine start, or when acknowledged
is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the by the driver pushing the steering wheel switch
shoulder belt without the booster seat. <ENTER> (where fitted).

NPA1294 NOTE
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and
If there is a change in rear seat belt status
Driver and front passenger during a journey then the applicable symbol
do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the
for any unbuckled seat will show again for a
vehicle is moving. The seat belt warning lights j
1 , located in the in- further 35 seconds.
PREGNANT WOMEN strument panel, will light up if the driver and/or front
passenger seat belts have not been fastened. See The front passenger seat belt warning light
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in will not illuminate if the seat is unoccupied.
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
the 2. Instruments and controls section for further A chime will sound unless the front passen-
details. ger seat belt is securely fastened when the
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (15 MPH).
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never Dependant on the vehicle specification the seat belt
warning lights, located in the instrument control The chime will stop after approximately 90
put the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. seconds.
Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. panel, will either:
Alert only the driver when his/her seat belt is not
securely fastened.
Alert the driver and/or front passenger when a
seat belt is not securely fastened.

1-10 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.
The shoulder belt will not be against your
body. In an accident, you could be thrown into
it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries. SSS0292Z SSS0290Z

For the most effective protection when the


vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up- The retractor is designed to lock during a 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retrac-
right. Always sit well back in the seat with sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling tor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt motion permits the belt to move and al- belt is routed over your shoulder and across your
properly. lows you some freedom of movement in chest.
the seat.
Fastening the seat belts Unfastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See Seats earlier in this sec-
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its
fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt
tion.) and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and out of the retractor.
insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on
and feel the latch engage. the hips as shown

SSS0326Z

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the


buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11


Checking seat belt operation Shoulder belt height adjustment The shoulder belt anchor height should be
(where fitted) adjusted to the position that is best for you.
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness
movement by two separate methods: of the entire restraint system and increase the
When the belt is pulled quickly from the retrac- chance or severity of injury in an accident.
tor.
Centre of rear seat
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check
the operation as follows:
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly.
The retractor should lock and restrict further belt
NPA1254
movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or if
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted
you have any questions about seat belt operation,
to the position that is best for you. (See Precau-
see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) LVR0006XZ

To adjust, push (squeeze) the adjustment button


j1 , and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the Selecting the correct seat buckle:
preferred position j2 so that the belt passes over The centre seat belt buckle is identified by the
the centre of the shoulder. The belt should be away CENTRE mark j A . The centre seat belt tongue must
from your face and neck, but not falling off of your only be fastened into the centre seat belt buckle.
shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the
shoulder belt anchor into position. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild
WARNING soap solution or any solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then wipe with a
After adjustment, release the adjustment but-
cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade.
ton and then try to move the shoulder belt
anchor up and down to make sure that it is Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they
securely fixed in position. are completely dry.

1-12 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SYSTEM

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of


WARNING
propriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract disposal procedures could cause personal in-
slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused jury.
dry cloth. after activation. It must be replaced together The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system is acti-
with the retractor as a unit.
Periodically check to see that the seat belt vated in conjunction with the front air bag system. It
and the metal components, such as buckles, If the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle is in-
tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure volved in certain types of collisions by restraining
work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts to have the pre-tensioner system checked the seat occupants via the seat belt retractor.
or other damage on the webbing is found, the and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belts
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced. dealer or qualified workshop. retractor. These seat belts are used in the same way
No unauthorised changes should be made to as conventional seat belts.
any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner Additionally, the drivers side pre-tensioner seat belt
seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental system is also equipped with a lap pre-tensioner.
activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or Both the retractor pre-tensioner and lap pre-ten-
damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt opera- sioner provide significant protection against injury in
tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat an accident and increase the safety performance of
belt system may result in serious personal in- your vehicle.
jury.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt system activates,
Work on and around the pre-tensioner system smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
should be done by an authorised NISSAN The smoke is harmless, but care should be taken
dealer or qualified workshop. Installation of not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking.
electrical equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Unau- When the ignition switch is in the ON or START
thorised electrical test equipment and prob- position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
ing devices should not be used on the pre- air bag warning light will illuminate. The SRS air bag
tensioner seat belt system. warning light will turn off after approximately 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If any of the follow-
If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or ing conditions occur, the air bag and/or pre-ten-
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or sioner seat belt need servicing and your vehicle must
qualified workshop. Correct pre-tensioner be taken to the nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified
disposal procedures are set forth in the ap- workshop.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13


CHILD SAFETY

The air bag warning light remains on after ap- Children need adults to help protect them. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and chil-
proximately 7 seconds. dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to
They need to be properly restrained.
accident statistics, children are safer when prop-
The air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
In addition to the general information in this manual, erly restrained in the rear seat than in the front
The air bag warning light does not come on at child safety information is available from many other seat.
all. sources, including doctors, teachers, government
This is especially important because your vehicle
traffic safety offices, and community organisations.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Re- has a supplemental restraint system (air bag sys-
Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best
straint System (SRS) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt tem) for the front passenger. (See Supplemen-
way to transport your child.
may not function properly. It must be checked and tal Restraint System (SRS) later in this section.)
repaired. There are two basic types of child restraint system:
INFANTS
When selling your vehicle, we request that you in- Rear-facing child restraints
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in
form the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tem and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections Front-facing child restraints a rear-facing child restraint. You should choose a
in this Owners Manual. The proper restraint depends on the childs size. child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than the manufacturers instructions for installation and
9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. use.
Front-facing child restraints are available for chil- SMALL CHILDREN
dren who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and
are at least 1 year old. Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least
9 kg can be placed in a front-facing child restraint.
WARNING Refer to the manufacturers instructions for mini-
mum and maximum weight and height recommen-
Infants and children need special protection. The dations. You should choose a child restraint that fits
vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers
The shoulder belt may come too close to the instructions for installation and use.
face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their
small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- LARGER CHILDREN
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Children who are too large for a child restraint sys-
Always use appropriate child restraints. tem should be seated and restrained by the seat
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by belts that are provided. If the childs seating position
using either the ISOFIX child restraint system or has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or
with the vehicle seat belt, see Child restraints later neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially avail-
in this section for more information. able) may help overcome this. The booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

1-14 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


CHILD RESTRAINTS

properly positioned across the top, middle portion PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-
of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. RESTRAINTS properly fitting seat belt could cause serious
The booster seat should also fit the vehicle seat. or fatal injury.
Once the child has grown so that the shoulder belt
is no longer on or near the face or neck of the child, NISSAN recommends that the child restraint
system be installed in the rear seat. Accord-
use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. In
ing to accident statistics, children are safer
addition, there are many types of child restraint sys-
when properly restrained in the rear seat
tem available for larger children that should be used
rather than in the front seat.
for maximum protection.
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS Child restraint systems specially designed for
infants and small children are available from
Check any legal requirements applicable in your lo- several manufacturers. When selecting any
cation. For example, the U.K. has legal requirements SSS0099Z child restraint systems, place your child in the
to use child restraints based on height and age, see child restraint system and check the various
Child restraints later in this section for more infor- adjustments to be sure that the child restraint
mation WARNING system is compatible with your child. Always
follow the manufacturers instructions for in-
Infants and small children should always be
stallation and use.
placed in an appropriate child restraint sys-
tem while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use
a child restraint system can result in serious
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturers
instructions for installation and use. When
injury or death. purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select
one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may
Infants and small children should never be
not be possible to properly install some types
carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
the strongest adult to resist the forces of a of child restraint in your vehicle.
severe accident. The child could be crushed
between the adult and parts of the vehicle.
Check the child restraint system in your ve-
hicle to be sure that it is compatible with the
Also, do not put the same seat belt around a vehicles seat belt system.
child and yourself.
For a front-facing child restraint system,
Infants and children need special protection. check to make sure the shoulder belt does
The vehicles seat belts may not fit them prop- not fit close to childs face or neck.
erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to
the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15


Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- When the child restraint system is not in use, Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
tem on the front passenger seat without first keep it secured with the ISOFIX child restraint sure it is compatible with vehicles seat belt sys-
deactivating the passenger air bag with the system or a seat belt to prevent it from being tem.
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted), thrown around in case of a sudden stop or
see Front passenger air bag switch (where accident. Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of
the recommended fitment positions and the ap-
fitted) later in this section. In a frontal colli-
NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil- proved child restraints for your vehicle.
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
dren be seated in a child restraint system. You
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
should choose a child restraint system that fits your
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
vehicle and always follow the manufacturers in-
or kill your child.
structions for installation and use. In addition, there
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to are many types of child restraint systems available
fit the child restraint system, but as upright as for larger children that should be used for maximum
possible. protection.
If the seat belt in the position where a child CAUTION
restraint system is installed requires a locking
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed
device and if it is not used, injuries could re-
vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating
sult from a child restraint system tipping over
surface and buckles before placing your child in
during normal vehicle braking or cornering.
a child restraint.
After attaching a child restraint system, test it
CHILD RESTRAINT AND ISOFIX
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure INFORMATION
that it is held securely in place. The child re- When selecting any child restraint, keep the follow-
straint system should not move more than 25 ing points in mind:
mm (1 in). If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the belt as necessary, or install the restraint in Choose a child restraint that complies with the
another seat and test it again. latest European safety standard, ECE Regula-
tion 44.04.
If a child restraint system is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a Place your child in the child restraint and check
collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. the various adjustments to be sure the child re-
straint is compatible with your child. Always fol-
Improper use of a child restraint system can low all of the recommended procedures.
increase the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants in the vehicle.

1-16 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Approved universal child restraint positions
Suitability
Mass group Front passenger Front passenger
seat seat Rear outer seat Rear centre seat
Air bag ON Air bag OFF
0 <10 kg X U U X
0+ <13 kg X j1 U/Lj 2 j 1 U/Lj
2 X
I 9 to 18 kg X j3U j3U X
II 15 to 25 kg X j
4 UF j 4 UF/Lj5 X
III 22 to 36 kg X j
6 UF j 6 UF/Lj7 X

X: Not suitable for child restraint system


U: Suitable for universal category child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing universal category child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table or vehicle list of child restraint manufacturer
j#: The circled numbers in the table above correspond to the circled numbers in the following table

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17


List of suitable Child Restraint Systems (CRS)
Suitability
Mass group Front seat lifter
Name of CRS Fixture of CRS Facing position
position
0 <10 kg - - -
j
1 Maxi Cosi
Belt mounted Rear facing
Cabrio Fix
0+ <13 kg j2 Maxi Cosi Belt mounted +
Without lifter
Cabrio Fix plus base and sup- Rear facing
only
Easy Fix port leg
I 9 to 18 kg
j3 Rmer King
Belt mounted Front facing
plus
j
4 Rmer Kid fix Belt mounted Front facing Highest
II 15 to 25 kg Belt mounted +
j
5 Rmer Kid fix
ISOFIX
Front facing N/A
j
6 Rmer Kid fix Belt mounted Front facing Highest
III 22 to 36 kg Belt mounted +
j
7 Rmer Kid fix
ISOFIX
Front facing N/A

1-18 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Approved ISOFIX child restraint positions
Suitability
Mass group
Front passenger seat Rear outer seat Rear centre seat
F ISO/L1 X X X
Carry-cot
G ISO/L2 X X X
0 (< 10 kg) E ISO/R1 X IL X
E ISO/R1 X ILj 8 X
0+ (< 13 kg) D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X ILj 9 X
D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X ILj 9 X
I (9 to 18 kg) B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X j
10 IL, IUF j
11 X
A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF X
II (15 to 25 kg) X IL, IUF X
III (22 to 36 kg) X IL, IUF X

X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system


IUF: Suitable for universal category forward-facing child restraint system approved for this weight (mass) group
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX category child restraint system (CRS) given in the following table or vehicle list of child
restraint manufacturer
j
#: The circled numbers in the table above correspond to the circled numbers in the following table

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19


List of suitable ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems (CRS)
Mass group Name of CRS Facing position Category
Maxi Cosi Cabrio
0+ (<13 kg) E ISO/R1 Fix plus Easy Fix Rear facing Semi-universalj
8
Base
0+ /1 (<18 BeSafe iZi Kid X3
E ISO/R3 Rear facing Semi-universalj
9
kg) Isofix
Maxi Cosi pearl
Front facing Semi-universalj
10
I (9 to 18 kg) B1 ISO/F2X plus family fix
Rmer Duo plus Front facing Universalj
11

1-20 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


List of approved Child Restraint Systems (CRS) WARNING

Age group
Size Name of
Fixture of CRS Facing position Category Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
Class CRS tem on the front passenger seat without first
0 < 13 kg Maxi Cosi EasyFix ISO Base deactivating the passenger air bag with the
E Rear Semi-universal
(Group 0+) Cabriofix with Support Leg front passenger air bag switch (where fitted),
9 to 18 kg Britax Rmer see Front passenger air bag switch (where
B1 ISO/FX2 Top Tether Front Universal fitted) later in this section. In a frontal colli-
(Group I) Duo
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in-
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
or kill your child.
In vehicles equipped with a side air bag sys-
tem, do not let any infants or small children sit
in the front passenger seat as the air bag may
cause serious injury in case of deployment
during a collision.
NOTE
Child restraints approved to ECE Regulation NO.
44.04 are clearly marked with the categories such
as Universal, Semi-universal or ISOFIX.
ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points
that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems.
ISOFIX lower anchor point locations
The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outer seating positions
only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in
the centre position using the ISOFIX anchors.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21


CAUTION this manual and those supplied with the child re-
straints. See ISOFIX child restraint system later in
Store the loose ISOFIX covers to avoid losing
this section.
them and somewhere where they will not get
damaged, for example, in the console box see CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE
Console box in the 2. Instruments and
controls section. Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child
restraint system on the rear seat. When installing a
ISOFIX child restraint anchor child restraint system, carefully read and follow the
attachments instructions in this manual and those supplied with
the child restraint system.
NPA1290
ISOFIX anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
SSS0644Z damage the child restraint anchorages. The
Anchor attachment child restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a child
ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attach- could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-
NPA1291
ments that can be connected to two anchors lo- sion.
ISOFIX cover removal
cated in the seat. Check your child restraint for a
The ISOFIX anchor points are located, under cov- label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX The child restraint top tether strap may be
ers labelled ISOFIX, at the bottom of the rear seat child restraints. This information may also be in the damaged by contact with the parcel shelf or
cushions. To access an ISOFIX anchor point insert instructions provided by the child restraint manufac- items in the luggage area. Remove the parcel
your finger into the cover and pull the cover off. turer. shelf from the vehicle or secure it and any
ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of luggage see Parcel shelf in the 2. Instru-
a top tether strap or other anti-rotation devices such ments and controls section. Your child could
as support legs. When installing ISOFIX child re- be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
straints, carefully read and follow the instructions in the top tether strap is damaged.

1-22 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Anchorage location CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION Installation on rear outer seats
USING ISOFIX Front-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions for
WARNING
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
specified locations. For the ISOFIX lower an- rear outer seats using ISOFIX:
chor locations, see ISOFIX lower anchor
point locations earlier in this section. If a child
restraint is not secured properly, your child
could be seriously injured or killed in an acci-
NPA1292 dent.
Do not install child restraints that require the
The anchor points are located on the seatback be- use of a top tether strap to seating positions
hind the rear outer seating positions and should only that do not have a top tether anchor.
be used for child restraints in the rear outer posi-
tions. Do not secure a child restraint in the centre
SSS0646AZ
rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower
anchors. The child restraint will not be se- Steps 1 and 2

cured properly. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat j


1.
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling the ISOFIX lower anchors j 2.
to make sure there are no obstructions over
the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt web- 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured
bing or seat cushion material. The child re- against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, ad-
straint will not be secured properly if the just or remove the head restraint to obtain the
ISOFIX anchors are obstructed. correct child restraint fit. (See Head restraints
NPA1358 earlier in this section.) If the head restraint is
Child restraint anchorages are designed to removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor- install the head restraint when the child restraint
For Australia:
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- is removed. If the seating position does not have
An additional centre anchor point (where fitted) is stance are they to be used for adult seat belts, an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
located on the centre seatback. harnesses or for attaching other items or with the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
equipment to the vehicle. ing position or a different child restraint.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23


Rear-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions for
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the
rear outer seats using ISOFIX:

SSS0754AZ SSS0755AZ
Step 4 Step 7

4. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child 7. Test the child restraint before you place the child
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j 3 in it j
5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and rearward j 4 firmly in the centre of the child and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle securely in place. SSS0649AZ
seat cushion and seatback. Steps 1 and 2
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether properly secured prior to each use. If the child 1. Position the child restraint on the seat j
1.
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 7. 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See the ISOFIX lower anchors j 2.
Child restraint anchorage earlier in this sec-
tion.)
6. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child
restraint manufacturers instructions.

SSS0756AZ
Step 3

1-24 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


3. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j 3 properly secured prior to each use. If the child
and rearward j 4 firmly in the centre of the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.
restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback. If any contact occurs CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
between the child restraint and the front seat, USING THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
slide the front seat forward until contact no longer BELT
occurs.
Installation on rear seats
4. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether Front-facing:
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the SSS0493AZ
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See Step 2
Child restraint anchorage earlier in this sec-
tion.) 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle j
2 until you
5. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti- hear and feel the latch engage.
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child 3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
restraint manufacturers instructions. necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
locking devices attached to the child restraint.

SSS0758AZ
Step 1

Be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions for


the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto-
matic locking mode:

SSS0757AZ
1. Position the child restraint on the seat j
1 . If any
Step 6 contact occurs between the child restraint and SSS0647AZ

the front seat, slide the front seat forward until Step 4
6. Test the child restraint before you place the child contact no longer occurs.
in it j
5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25


4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; Rear-facing: 3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
press downward j 3 and rearward j 4 firmly in necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to locking devices attached to the child restraint.
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.

SSS0759AZ
Step 1
SSS0639AZ
Be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions for
Step 4
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
SSS0638AZ
steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the 4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
press downward j 3 and rearward j
Step 5
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto- 4 firmly in
5. Test the child restraint before you place the child matic locking mode: the centre of the child restraint with your hand to
in it j
5 . Push the child restraint from side to side 1. Position the child restraint on the seat j
1. compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held while pulling up on the seat belt.
securely in place.
6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.

SSS0654AZ
SSS0658AZ
Step 2
Step 5
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle j
2 until you
hear and feel the latch engage.

1-26 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


5. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it j
5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.

SSS0300AZ

Installation on front passengers seat Child restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore must
WARNING not be used on the front passengers seat
when the front passengers air bag has not
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- been deactivated.
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the Front-facing:
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted), Be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions for
see Front passenger air bag switch (where the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
fitted) later in this section. In a frontal colli- steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in- front passengers seat using a 3-point type seat belt
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen- without automatic locking mode:
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
1. Turn off the front passenger air bag using the
or kill your child.
front passenger air bag switch. (See Supple-
Never install a child restraint with a top tether mental Restraint System (SRS) later in this sec-
strap on the front seat. tion.) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
and make sure that the front air bag status light
NISSAN recommends that a child restraint be
illuminates.
installed on the rear seat. However, if you
must install a child restraint on the front pas-
sengers seat, move the passengers seat to
the rearmost position.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27


5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
straint and insert it into the buckle j
3 until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
6. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
locking devices attached to the child restraint.

SSS0627Z SSS0302GZ
Steps 2 and 3 Step 8

2. Move the seat to the rearmost position j


1. 8. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it j
6 . Push the child restraint from side to side
3. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
j2 . Remove it if it interferes with the child re-
securely in place.
straint installation. In such situations, securely
SSS0647BZ
store the head restraint in the luggage compart- 9. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
Step 7
ment so that it does not become a dangerous properly secured prior to each use. If the child
projectile during a sudden stop or in an accident. 7. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; restraint is loose, repeat steps 5 through 8.
press downward j 4 and rearward j 5 firmly in
Rear facing:
4. Position the child restraint in the seat.
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback If you must install a child restraint system in the front
while pulling up on the seat belt. seat, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the front passenger air bag using the
front passenger air bag switch. (See Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS) later in this sec-
tion.) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
and make sure that the front air bag status light
illuminates.

SSS0360CZ
Step 5

1-28 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section
contains important information concerning the driv-
ers and passengers supplemental front impact air
bags, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact air bags,
and pre-tensioner seat belts.

SSS0627Z SSS0513Z
Supplemental front-impact air bag
Steps 2 and 3 system
2. Move the seat to the rearmost position. 5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re- This system can help cushion the impact force to
straint system and insert it into the buckle until the head and chest area of the driver and/or front
3. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. passenger in certain frontal collisions. The supple-
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Remove it if it interferes with the child restraint mental front-impact air bag is designed to inflate on
To prevent slack in the lap belt, secure the shoul-
installation. In such situations, securely store the
der belt in place with a locking clip j A . Use a the front where the vehicle is impacted.
head restraint in the luggage compartment so
locking clip attached to the child restraint sys-
that it does not become a dangerous projectile
tem, or one which is equivalent in dimensions
Front seat-mounted side-impact
during a sudden stop or in an accident. supplemental air bag system
and strength.
4. Position the child restraint system in the front Be sure to follow the child restraint system (where fitted)
passenger seat. manufacturers instructions for belt routing. This system can help cushion the impact force to
Always follow the child restraint system manu- the chest and pelvis areas of the driver and front
6. Slide the seat forwards so that the seat belt fully
facturers instructions for installation and use. passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The front
tightens the child restraint system and the child
restraint reaches the vehicle dashboard. seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
7. Test the child restraint system before you place impacted.
the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
if it is held securely in place.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
supplemental air bag system and as far away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
(where fitted)
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of the driver and passengers in front and
rear outer seating positions in certain side-impact
collisions. The roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag is designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted.
NPA926Z
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash pro- Correct (rear) seating positions
tection provided by the driver and front passenger
seat belts and is not designed to substitute them. Driver and front passenger air bags:
SSS0100Z
Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated a suitable dis- WARNING
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and front door finishers. For additional infor-
The supplemental front-impact air bags ordi- WARNING
narily will not inflate in the event of a side
mation, see Seat belts earlier in this section. impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- Never install a child restraint system in the
ity frontal collision. Always wear the seat belts front seat. An inflating supplemental front-im-
After placing the ignition switch in the ON or
to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in pact air bag could seriously injure or kill your
START position, the air bag warning light will illu-
accidents. child (see Air bag warning labels later in this
minate. The air bag warning light will turn off
section).
after approximately 7 seconds if the system is The seat belts and the supplemental front-im-
operational. See Warning/indicator lights and pact air bags are most effective when you are Children may be severely injured or killed
audible reminders in the 2. Instruments and sitting well back and upright in the seat. The when the air bags inflate if they are not prop-
controls section for further details. front-impact air bags inflate with great force. erly restrained see Child restraints earlier in
If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit- this section.
The air bag will operate only when the ignition
ting sideways, or out of position in any way,
switch is in the ON or START position.
you are at greater risk of injury or death in an
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend
their hands or face out of the window. Do not
accident. You may also receive serious or fa- attempt to hold them in your lap or arms.
tal injuries from the supplemental front-im-
pact air bag if you are up against it when it

1-30 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Side and curtain air bags (where fitted): When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold Air bag warning labels
onto the seatback of the front seats. If the
WARNING front seat-mounted side impact supplemental
air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-im-
The front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
pact supplemental air bags inflate, you may
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
be seriously injured. Be especially careful with
side-impact supplemental air bags ordinarily
children, who should always be properly re-
will not inflate in the event of a front impact,
strained.
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side
collision. Always wear the seat belts to help Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.
reduce the risk or severity of injury in acci- They may interfere with the front seat-
dents. mounted side-impact supplemental air bag in- NPA1155
flations.
The seat belts, the front seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags and roof- NOTE j
1 SRS air bag warning label: The warning label
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental is located on the surface of the front pas-
For an overview see Seat belts and supplemen-
air bags are most effective when you are sit- senger sun visor.
tal restraint system in the 0. Illustrated table of
ting well back and upright in the seat. The
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-
contents section. j
2 SRS front passenger air bag warning label:
tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-im- Pre-tensioner seat belt system The warning label is located on the outer side
pact supplemental air bags inflate with great of the instrument panel (passenger side).
The pre-tensioner seat belt system may activate with
force. If you and your passengers are unre-
the supplemental air bag system in certain types of j
3 SRS side air bag warning label: The warning
strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways, or label is located on the side of the passenger
collisions.
out of position in any way, you and your pas- side centre pillar. Tags are also sewn into the
sengers are at greater risk of injury or death in Working with the seat belt retractor and anchor, it front seat covers.
an accident. helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions, help- SRS front-impact passenger air bag:
Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legs,
ing to restrain front seat occupants. See Pre-ten- The warning label j
1 is located on the sun visor.
or face near the front seat-mounted side-im-
pact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted sioner seat belt system earlier in this section.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on
curtain side-impact supplemental air bags on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
the sides of the seatback of the front seats or it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone occur.
sitting in the front seats or rear outer seats to
extend their hands out of the windows or lean
against the doors.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31


The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children SRS air bag warning light Have the air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat
aged 12 and under. Always use seat belts and belt systems serviced at the nearest NISSAN dealer
child restraints. For maximum safety protection or qualified workshop if any of the following condi-
in all types of crashes, you must always wear tions occur:
your safety belt. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the airbag. Do not place any objects over The SRS air bag warning light remains on after
approximately 7 seconds.
the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. If
the airbag warning light stays on or is flashing The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tently.
tion, go to a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop. Airbags can only be removed or disposed
The SRS air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate at all.
of by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. NPA1295
Under these conditions, the air bag systems and/or
Be sure to read the AIRBAG LABEL description pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate
at the end of this manual. The SRS air bag warning light, displaying in
the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the properly. They must be checked and repaired. Con-
In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat- tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop imme-
air bag system, use a rear-facing child restraint sys- mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (where diately.
tem only on the rear seats. fitted), supplemental curtain side-impact air bags
When installing a child restraint system in your ve- (where fitted), and pre-tensioner seat belt systems.
hicle, always follow the child restraint system manu- The circuits monitored by the SRS air bag warning
facturers instructions for installation. For informa- light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sen-
tion, see Child restraints earlier in this section. sor, satellite sensors, front impact air bag modules,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bag modules (where fitted), roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bag modules (where
fitted), pre-tensioner seat belt systems, and all re-
lated wiring.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates. The air bag warning light will
turn off after approximately 7 seconds if the sys-
tem is operational.

1-32 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
pad. Do not place any objects between the
driver and steering wheel pad. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if a supplemental air bag inflates.
Immediately after inflation, several supple-
mental air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them: you may severely burn
yourself.
No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the supplemen-
tal air bag systems. This is to prevent acci-
dental inflation of the supplemental air bags
or damage to the supplemental air bag sys-
tems.
Do not make unauthorised changes to your
vehicles electrical system, suspension sys-
tem or front end structure. This could affect
proper operation of the supplemental air bag
systems.
NIC2170
Tampering with the supplemental air bag sys-
tems may result in serious personal injury.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS 5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
Tampering includes changes to the steering
supplemental air bag modules
1. Crash zone sensor wheel by placing materials over the steering
6. Lap outer pre-tensioner (drivers side) wheel pad and above, and by installing addi-
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules tional trim materials around the supplemental
7. Seat belt with pre-tensioners
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag systems.
air bag modules 8. Satellite sensors
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 9. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
supplemental air bags inflators

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33


Work around and on the supplemental air bag inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause For models with front passenger air bag switch:
systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air The front passenger air bag is designed to be turned
or qualified workshop. The SRS wiring should bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to off using the front passenger air bag switch, only if
not be modified or disconnected. Unautho- the lower body. absolutely necessary.
rised electrical test equipment and probing Front passenger air bag status light (where fit-
devices should not be used on the supple- Supplemental front-impact air bag
ted):
mental air bag systems. system
The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel- The drivers supplemental front-impact air bag is
low and/or orange for easy identification. located at the centre of the steering wheel. The pas-
sengers supplemental front-impact air bag is lo-
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- cated at the instrument panel above the glove box.
tem on the front passenger seat without first
deactivating the passenger air bag with the The supplemental front-impact air bag system is de-
front passenger air bag switch (where fitted), signed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
see Front passenger air bag switch (where although it may inflate if the forces in another type of
fitted) later in this section. In a frontal colli- collision are similar to those of a higher severity fron-
sion, supplemental front-impact air bags in- tal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal colli- SSS0676Z
flate with great force. An inflating supplemen- sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure indication of proper supplemental front-impact air
or kill your child. bag system operation.

When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be WARNING
heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke
is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. However, Never install a rear-facing child restraint system
care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause on the front passenger seat without first deacti-
irritation and choking. Occupants with a history of vating the passenger air bag with the front pas-
breathing difficulties, such as asthma, should get senger air bag switch (where fitted), see Front
fresh air promptly. passenger air bag switch (where fitted) later in
this section. In a frontal collision, supplemental
Supplemental air bags, along with the use of seat front-impact air bags inflate with great force. An JVR0264XZ
belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest inflating supplemental front-impact air bag could
of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cush- seriously injure or kill your child.
ion the impact force to the head of occupants in the
front and rear outer seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

1-34 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


When the ignition switch is placed in the ON j
A Air bag switch (where fitted)
WARNING position and the front passenger air bag is inac-
j
B Left Hand Drive models
Since your vehicle is equipped with a front tive, both the front passenger air bag status ON
j
C Right Hand Drive models
passenger air bag, it is not permitted to install light , and the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
a rearward facing child restraint on the front tem (SRS) air bag warning light in the com-
passenger seat unless the front passenger air bination meter j 1 will turn on after about 7 sec-
bag has been deactivated first. onds.

Do not fit a rearward facing child seat on the The front passenger air bag status OFF light
front passenger seat if the air bag activation/ will illuminate and remain on as long as the
deactivation system (where fitted) is malfunc- front passenger air bag switch is in the OFF
tioning. Your vehicle must immediately be position.
taken to a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- If the front passenger air bag status light operates in
shop in such a situation. a way other than described above, the front passen-
NPA1297
The front passenger air bag status lights and ger air bag may not function properly. Have the sys-
are located on the instrument panel above the tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by a
shift lever. NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly. To turn off the front passenger air bag:
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- Front passenger air bag switch (where fitted): 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
tion, the front passenger air bag status ON and The front passenger air bag can be turned off with 2. Open the glove box and insert the key into the
OFF lights illuminate and then turn off or remain on the front passenger air bag switch j
A located inside front passenger air bag switch. For Intelligent
depending on the front passenger air bag status. the glove box. Key equipped models, see Keys in the 3. Pre-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON driving checks and adjustments section for me-
position and the front passenger air bag is ac- chanical key usage.
tive, both the front passenger air bag status OFF
3. Push and turn the key to the OFF position.
light , and the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) air bag warning light in the com- 4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
bination meter j 1 will turn off after about 7 sec- front passenger air bag status OFF light
onds. will illuminate and remain on.
The front passenger air bag status ON light
will illuminate and then turn off after a period of
time when the front passenger air bag switch is NPA1296

in the ON position.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35


occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air bag will de-
flate quickly after the collision is over.
Supplemental sideimpact curtain air
bag system (where fitted)
The supplemental sideimpact curtain air bag is lo-
cated in the roof side trims.
The supplemental sideimpact curtain air bag sys-
NPA1301 NPA849Z tem is designed to inflate in higher severity side col-
lisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a higher se-
To turn on the front passenger air bag: Supplemental sideimpact air bag verity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. system collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-
2. Open the glove box and insert the key into the The supplemental side air bags are located in the ways an indication of proper supplemental curtain
front passenger air bag switch. outside of the seatback of the front seats. sideimpact air bag system operation.

3. Push and turn the key to the ON position. The supplemental side-impact air bag system is de- The seat belts should be correctly worn and the rear
signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, seat passengers should be seated as far away as
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The although it may inflate if the forces in another type of practical from the door finishers and side roof rails.
front passenger air bag status ON light will collision are similar to those of a higher severity side The curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help
illuminate, and after a period of time, will then impact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. protect the front and rear occupants. Because of
turn off. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- this, the force of the curtain air bag inflating can
cation of proper supplemental side-impact air bag increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
system operation. to, or is against, these air bag modules during infla-
tion. The curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the collision is over.
driver and passenger seated upright, and as far as
is practical, away from the side air bag. The side air
WARNING
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front
occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air Directly after inflation, several air bag system
bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the components will be hot. Do not touch them;
you may severely burn yourself.

1-36 Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


No unauthorised changes should be made to REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,
any components or wiring of the air bag sys- PROCEDURE information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seat
tem. This is to prevent accidental inflation of belts and related parts should be pointed out to the
the air bag or damage to the air bag system. person performing the maintenance. The ignition
WARNING
switch should always be in the LOCK position when
Tampering with the air bag system may result
Once the air bags have been inflated, the air working under the bonnet or inside the vehicle.
in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
bag modules will not function and must be
making changes to the steering wheel and
replaced. The air bag modules must be re-
the instrument panel assembly by placing ma-
placed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
terial over the steering pad and above the
shop. The inflated air bag modules cannot be
dashboard, or by installing additional trim ma-
repaired.
terial around the air bag system.
Do not attach any objects to the steering The air bag systems should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if there
wheel pad or to the instrument panel. Objects
is any damage to the front end portion of the
attached to the steering wheel pad and in-
vehicle.
strument panel may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the air bag inflates. When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the air bag system and
Work on and around the air bag system should
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in
be done by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
this Owners Manual.
shop. Installation of electrical equipment
should be done by a NISSAN dealer or quali- If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the
fied workshop. The yellow SRS wiring har- vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
nesses* should not be modified or discon- workshop. Correct disposal procedures are
nected. Unauthorised electrical test equip- set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service
ment and probing devices should not be used Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could
on the air bag system. cause personal injury.
* SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow The air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-
insulation either just before the harness con- signed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
nectors or on the complete harness, for easy reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light is
identification. damaged, the SRS air bag warning light remains
illuminated after inflation has occurred. The repair
and replacement of the SRS should be done only by
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Safety seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37


2 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges .................................................. 2-2 Headlight switch ................................................. 2-36


Speedometer...................................................... 2-2 Turn signal switch............................................... 2-38
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-2 Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-38
Tachometer ........................................................ 2-2 Front fog light (where fitted)................................ 2-38
Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-3 Rear fog light (where fitted)................................. 2-39
Instrument panel brightness control..................... 2-3 Headlight aiming control .......................................... 2-39
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-4 Headlight aiming control switch (where fitted) ..... 2-39
Checking bulbs .................................................. 2-4 Automatic aiming control (LED headlights) .......... 2-40
Warning lights .................................................... 2-5 Headlight cleaner (where fitted) ............................... 2-40
Indicator lights .................................................... 2-10 Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted) ............... 2-40
Audible reminders............................................... 2-12 Horn ........................................................................ 2-41
Vehicle information display ....................................... 2-13 Seat heating (where fitted) ....................................... 2-41
How to use the Vehicle Information Display......... 2-14 Power outlet ............................................................ 2-42
Startup display.................................................... 2-14 Storage ................................................................... 2-42
Settings.............................................................. 2-14 Storage trays ...................................................... 2-42
Vehicle information display warnings and Glove box ........................................................... 2-42
indicators............................................................ 2-21 Console box ....................................................... 2-43
Trip computer ..................................................... 2-27 Cup holders ....................................................... 2-44
[Clock] and [outside air temperature].................. 2-29 Bottle holder....................................................... 2-44
Traffic sign recognition (where fitted) .................. 2-30 Coat hooks......................................................... 2-44
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-32 Map pocket (where fitted) ................................... 2-44
Windscreen........................................................ 2-32 Seat pocket (where fitted)................................... 2-44
Rear window ...................................................... 2-33 Roof rail (where fitted) ........................................ 2-45
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button ................. 2-34 Parcel shelf ........................................................ 2-45
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where Luggage compartment/boot floor (where
fitted).................................................................. 2-34 fitted).................................................................. 2-47
Defogger switch ...................................................... 2-35 Luggage hooks................................................... 2-47
Rear window defogger ....................................... 2-35 Windows ................................................................. 2-48
Outside mirror defogger (where fitted) ................ 2-35 Power windows .................................................. 2-48
Headlight and turn signal switch............................... 2-36 Fixed glass roof (where fitted) .................................. 2-49
Sunshade operation............................................ 2-50 Rear room/reading light (where fitted) ................. 2-51
Interior lights............................................................ 2-50 Luggage compartment light ................................ 2-51
Room light control switch.................................... 2-50 Vanity mirror light (where fitted)........................... 2-51
Map lights (where fitted) ..................................... 2-50
METERS AND GAUGES

NOTE The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed in the The available range or distance to empty is per-
vehicle information display when the ignition switch manently shown at the bottom of the vehicle in-
For an overview see Meters and gauges in the
is in the ON position. formation display, see 3. [Range] (dte km or
0. Illustrated table of contents section and see
mile) later in this section.
Instrument and control layout in the 0. Illus- The odometer j 1 displays the total distance the
trated table of contents section. vehicle has been driven. CAUTION
SPEEDOMETER The twin trip odometer j
2 displays the distance of Refill the fuel tank before the range displays 0,
individual trips. or ---, and the gauge registers empty.
Changing twin trip odometer display: TACHOMETER
Push the TRIP RESET switch j 3 on the right or left
side of the combination meter panel to change the
display as follows:
TRIP A TRIP B ODO TRIP A
Resetting twin trip odometer:
Push the TRIP RESET switch j 3 for more than 1
NIC2171 second to reset the trip odometer to zero.
FUEL GAUGE
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. Scale NIC2172
resolution on the meter varies with models. The fuel gauge is active when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
Odometer/twin trip odometer The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revo-
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn- lutions per minute. Do not rev the engine into the
ing, acceleration, or when going uphill or downhill. red zone j 1.
The c symbol indicates that the fuel filler lid is Scale resolution on the meter varies with models.
located on the right side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
NOTE
When the engine speed approaches the red zone,
A low fuel warning comes on in the vehicle infor- shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the
mation display when the fuel level is getting low. red zone may cause serious engine damage.
Refuel as soon as it is convenient. There should
NIC2334
be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) (for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) the layout
fuel gauge needle reaches the empty level.
will be opposite)

2-2 Instruments and controls


ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS Push the + side of the switch j 2 to brighten the
GAUGE CONTROL meter panel lights and instrument panel lights. The
bar j
1 moves to the + side.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature should remain Push the - side of the switch j
2 to dim the lights.
within the normal range j2. The bar j
1 moves to the side.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the out- When the instrument brightness control is not oper-
side air temperature and driving conditions. ated for a few seconds the brightness adjustment
mode no longer appears.
CAUTION
If the gauge exceeds the normal range, stop as
soon as it is safely possible. If the engine has
overheated, continued operation of the vehicle NIC2117

may seriously damage the engine. See Engine LHD (Left Hand Drive)
overheat in the 6. In case of emergency sec-
tion for immediate action.

WARNING
Allow the engine to cool down before removing
the radiator cap to avoid the danger of being
scalded.

NIC2226
RHD (Right Hand Drive)

The instrument brightness control switch can be op-


erated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. When the switch is operated, the brightness
adjustment mode appears at the bottom of the ve-
hicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-3


WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- Seat belt (driver and front passenger)
Front fog light indicator light
ing light warning light
Supplemental Restraint System Glow plug indicator light* (Diesel
Brake warning light (red)
(SRS) air bag warning light engine)

Charge warning light Water in fuel filter warning light* High beam assist indicator light*

Forward Emergency Braking system


High beam indicator light
warning light*
Front passenger air bag status light*
Low tyre pressure warning light* Rear fog light indicator light*

Malfunction warning light (red)* Side light and headlight indicator


4WD mode indicator light (AUTO)*
Malfunction indicator light (orange) light

Master warning light 4WD mode indicator light (LOCK)* Slip indicator light

NATS security warning light Dipped beam indicator light Trailer direction indicator light

Parking brake warning light Door lock indicator light* Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)


Power steering warning light *: where fitted
OFF indicator light

CHECKING BULBS The following lights (where fitted) come on briefly Have the system checked, and repaired promptly by
and then go off: a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fas-
ten the seat belts and turn the ignition switch to the , , , , , , , Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in
ON position without starting the engine. the vehicle informational display between the speed-
, , , , , ,
ometer and tachometer see Vehicle information
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned- display later in this section.
out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system.

2-4 Instruments and controls


WARNING LIGHTS (ESP) warning light and the brake system warning Charge warning light
light (yellow) also illuminate. If the light illuminates
Also see Vehicle information display later in this while the ignition switch is in the ON position with When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
section. the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and charge warning light illuminates. After starting the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) perform the following steps: engine, the charge warning light turns off. This indi-
warning light 1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid level is cates that the charging system is operational.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the low, add fluid and have the system checked by a If the charge warning light illuminates while the en-
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See gine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that
nates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is Brake and clutch fluid in the 8. Maintenance the charging system is not functioning properly and
operational. and do-it-yourself section. may need servicing.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warn- When the charge warning light illuminates while driv-
is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS ing system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
is not functioning properly. Have the system fied workshop. Stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If the
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. alternator belt is loose, broken or missing, the charg-
WARNING ing system needs repair (see Drive belts in the
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself section).
is turned off. The brake system then operates nor- Your brake system may not be working prop-
mally, but without anti-lock assistance (see Brake erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be If the alternator belt appears to be functioning cor-
system in the 5. Starting and driving section). dangerous. If you judge the brake system to rectly but the charge warning light remains illumi-
be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service nated, have the charging system checked by a
BRAKE warning light (red) station for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
hicle towed because driving it could be dan-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- CAUTION
gerous.
tion, the light remains illuminated for a few seconds. Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is
If the light illuminates at any other time, it may indi- Pressing the brake pedal when the ignition
loose, broken or missing.
cate that the brake system is not functioning prop- switch is not in the ON position and/or when
erly. If the BRAKE warning light illuminates, stop the the brake fluid level is low may increase the Forward Emergency Braking
vehicle immediately and contact a NISSAN dealer stopping distance and braking will require system warning light
greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
or qualified workshop. (where fitted)
Low brake fluid warning light: If the brake fluid level is below the minimum
This light illuminates when the Forward Emergency
or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do Braking system is set to OFF on the lower display.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the not drive until the brake system has been
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If this warning checked at a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- If the light illuminates when the Forward Emergency
light illuminates, the Electronic Stability Programme shop. Braking system is ON, it may indicate that the sys-

Instruments and controls 2-5


tem is unavailable. See Forward emergency brak- TPMS and turn off the low tyre pressure warning position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have
ing system (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and light. Use a tyre pressure gauge to check the tyre the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
driving section for more details. pressure. fied workshop. The low tyre pressure warning does
not appear if the low tyre pressure warning light illu-
Low tyre pressure warning light The low tyre pressure (e.g., [Low tyre pressure])
minates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
(where fitted) warning appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low tyre For additional information, see Tyre Pressure Moni-
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Pressure Moni- pressure warning light remains illuminated. toring System (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and
toring System (TPMS) that monitors the tyre pres- driving section.
sure of all tyres except the spare. For additional information, see Vehicle information
display later in this section and Tyre Pressure
The low tyre pressure warning light warns of low Monitoring System (TPMS) later in this section. WARNING
tyre pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not func-
tioning properly. TPMS resetting must be also performed after a tyre Radio waves could adversely affect electric
or a wheel is replaced, or the tyres are rotated. medical equipment. Those who use a pace-
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- maker should contact the electric medical
tion, this light illuminates for about 1 second and Depending on a change in the outside temperature, equipment manufacturer for the possible in-
turns off. the low tyre pressure warning light may illuminate fluences before use.
even if the tyre pressure has been adjusted prop-
Low tyre pressure warning: erly. Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended If the light does not illuminate with the igni-
If the vehicle is being driven with low tyre pressure, COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are cold, tion switch pushed ON, have the vehicle
the warning light will illuminate. A low tyre pressure and reset the TPMS. checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
warning (e.g., [Low tyre pressure]) also appears in workshop as soon as possible.
If the low tyre pressure warning light still continues
the vehicle information display. to illuminate after the resetting operation, it may indi- If the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
When the low tyre pressure warning light illuminates, cate that the TPMS is not functioning properly. Have nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
you should stop and adjust the tyre pressure of all 4 the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- manoeuvres or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
tyres to the recommended COLD tyre pressure fied workshop. speed, pull off the road to a safe location and
shown on the tyre placard located on the driver side stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
For additional information, see Tyre Pressure Moni- with under-inflated tyres may permanently
centre pillar see Tyre placard in the 9. Technical toring System (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and
information section. The low tyre pressure warning damage the tyres and increase the likelihood
driving section and Vehicle information display of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could
light does not automatically turn off when the tyre
later in this section. occur and may lead to an accident and could
pressure is adjusted. After the tyre is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven TPMS malfunction: result in serious personal injury. Check the
at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Adjust the tyre
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tyre pressure to the recommended COLD tyre
pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 pressure shown on the tyre placard, located
minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

2-6 Instruments and controls


on the driver side centre pillar, to turn the low Malfunction warning light (red) Master warning light
tyre pressure warning light off. If the light still (where fitted)
illuminates while driving after adjusting the When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
tyre pressure, a tyre may be flat. If you have a When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
master warning light illuminates if any of the follow-
flat tyre, repair it with the emergency tyre tion, the malfunction warning light illuminates. This ing are displayed in the vehicle information display
puncture repair kit (where fitted) or replace it means the system is operational.
(see Vehicle information display later in this sec-
with a spare tyre (where fitted) as soon as See Malfunction Indicator light (orange) later in tion):
possible. this section for details of the orange Malfunction
No key warning
After adjusting the tyre pressure, be sure to Indicator light.
Key ID incorrect warning
reset the TPMS. Unless the resetting is per- If the red malfunction warning light comes on steady
formed, the TPMS will not warn of the low tyre while the engine is running, it may indicate an en- Low windscreen washer fluid warning
pressure correctly. gine control system malfunction.
Parking brake release warning
When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is Have your vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
Door/boot open warning
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the qualified workshop. You do not need to have your
low tyre pressure warning light will flash for vehicle towed to the dealer. Low tyre pressure warning
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer or CAUTION Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning (where fitted)
qualified workshop as soon as possible for Continued vehicle operation without having the Intelligent Key system warning
tyre replacement and/or system resetting. engine control system checked and repaired as If the driver assist system warnings (where fitted)
Replacing tyres with those not originally speci- necessary could lead to poor driveability, appear in the vehicle information display, the master
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera- reduced fuel economy and possible damage to warning light also illuminates. See Blind Spot Warn-
tion of the TPMS. the engine control system, which may affect your ing (BSW) system (where fitted) in the 5. Starting
warranty coverage. and driving section, Lane Departure Warning
CAUTION
Incorrect setting of the engine control system may (LDW) system (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and
The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular lead to non-compliance of local and national emis- driving section, and/or Forward emergency brak-
tyre pressure check. Be sure to check the tyre sion laws and regulations. ing system (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and
pressure regularly. driving section.
If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less
than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the TPMS may not
operate correctly.
Be sure to install the specified size of tyres to
all four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-7


NATS security warning light Parking brake warning light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the Meter Switch
LOCK, OFF or Acc position. This function indi- Master warn-
Indicator Warning light Display text Buzzer LED
cates that your vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ing light
Anti-Theft System (NATS)*.
Parking brake
LED
If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
applied
m
Dynamic parking Warning light Release park-
For additional information, see Security system Beep LED
later in this section.
brake
m ON ing brake

* Immobilizer System failure


Depends on

status
m
Parking brake
switch pressed Press brake
LED
without brake pedal
pressed
m pedal

Parking brake can-


Release park-
not be released LED
automatically m ing brake

Parking brake LED


malfunction m
m

Flashing
Flashing

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the indicator light in the meter comes on (red)
when the parking brake is applied.
When the parking brake warning, light in the meter, and the LED (Light Emitting Diode), on the switch,
flash this may indicate a malfunction.

2-8 Instruments and controls


Low brake fluid warning light: If the brake fluid level is below the minimum need servicing. Have the electric power steering
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If this warning not drive until the brake system has been workshop. See Electric power steering system in
light illuminates, the Electronic Stability Programme checked at a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- the 5. Starting and driving section.
(ESP) warning light and the brake system warning shop.
Seat belt (driver and front
light (yellow) also illuminate. If the light illuminates For further parking brake operation information see passenger) warning light
while the ignition switch is in the ON position with Parking brake switch in the 8. Pre-driving checks
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and and adjustments section. The seat belt warning light reminds you to fasten
perform the following steps: your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
Power steering warning light ignition switch is placed in the ON or START posi-
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid level is tion and remains illuminated until the drivers and/or
low, add fluid and have the system checked by a front passengers seat belt is fastened. At the same
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See WARNING
time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless
Brake and clutch fluid in the 8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself section.
If the engine is not running or is turned off the drivers and/or front passengers seat belt is
while driving, the power assist for the steer- securely fastened see Seat belt reminder chime
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warn- ing will not work. Steering will be harder to later in this section. The seat belt warning light may
ing system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- operate. also illuminate if the front passengers seat belt is
fied workshop. not fastened when the front passengers seat is oc-
When the power steering warning light illumi-
cupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is
nates with the engine running, there will be
WARNING no power assist for the steering. You will still placed in the ON position, the system does not acti-
have control of the vehicle but the steering vate the warning light for the front passenger. See
Your brake system may not be working prop-
will be harder to operate. Have the power Seat belts in the 1. Safety Seats, Seat belts
erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be and Supplemental Restraint System section for
dangerous. If you judge the brake system to steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. precautions on seat belt usage.
be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service
station for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve- Supplemental Restraint System
hicle towed because driving it could be dan- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- (SRS) air bag warning light
gerous. tion, the power steering warning light illuminates.
After starting the engine, the power steering warn-
WARNING
Pressing the brake pedal when the ignition ing light turns off. This indicates that the electric
switch is not in the ON position and/or when power steering system is operational. If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it
the brake fluid level is low may increase the could mean that the front air bag, side air bag
stopping distance and braking will require If the power steering warning light illuminates while
(where fitted), curtain air bag (where fitted) and/
greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. the engine is running, it may indicate the power
or pre-tensioner systems will not operate in an
steering system is not functioning properly and may

Instruments and controls 2-9


accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or oth- Water in fuel filter warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS
ers, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN (where fitted)
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos- Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO
sible. If the warning light remains on or flashes irregularly indicator light (4WD models)
while the engine is running, there may be water in
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START the fuel filter. Should this happen, contact a NISSAN When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) dealer or qualified workshop. tion, the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO indicator
air bag warning light illuminates for approximately 7 light illuminates and then turns off.
seconds and then turns off this indicates the system CAUTION
When selecting 4WD AUTO mode while the engine
is operational. Failure to drain the water from the fuel filter can is running, the 4WD AUTO indicator light illumi-
If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag cause serious damage to the engine. Contact a nates. See Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)
systems and pre-tensioner systems need servicing NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as in the 5. Starting and driving section.
and the vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer possible.
or qualified workshop:
4WD mode indicator light
/ Front passenger air (LOCK) (4WD models)
The supplemental air bag warning light remains bag status light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
on after approximately 7 seconds. (where fitted) tion, the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes The front passenger air bag status light ( ) lo- light illuminates and then turns off. When selecting
intermittently. cated on the centre console above the shift lever will 4WD LOCK mode while the engine is running, the
illuminate when the front passenger air bag is turned 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates together with
The supplemental air bag warning light does not
OFF with the front passenger air bag switch. When the 4WD AUTO indicator light.
come on at all.
the front passenger air bag is turned on, the front See Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted) in the
Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys- passenger air bag status light ON ( ) will illumi-
tem and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt system may 5. Starting and driving section.
nate.
not function properly. Dipped beam indicator light
For more details, see Front passenger air bag sta-
For additional details see SRS air bag warning tus light (where fitted) in the 1. Safety Seats,
light in the 1. Safety Seats, Seat belts and Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System sec- This light comes on when the switch is turned to the
Supplemental Restraint System section. tion. position: The headlights will come on and front
side, tail, number plate and instrument lights remain
on.

2-10 Instruments and controls


Door lock indicator light tor light (see SLIP indicator light (where fitted) High beam indicator light
(where fitted) later in this section) come on with the ESP system
turned on, it alerts the driver to the fact that the sys- This light comes on when the headlight high beam
The door lock indicator light located on the instru- tems fail-safe mode is operating. This means that is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.
ment panel illuminates when all the doors are locked the system may not be functioning properly. Have
while the ignition switch is in the ON position. the system checked by your NISSAN dealer or quali- Malfunction Indicator light
When the doors are locked with the power door fied workshop. (orange)
lock switch, the door lock indicator light will illu- If an abnormality occurs in the system, the ESP sys- When the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
minate for 30 minutes. tem function will be cancelled, but the vehicle is still tion, the orange Malfunction Indicator light illumi-
driveable. For additional information, see Electronic nates. This means that the system is operational.
When the doors are locked by pushing the
Stability Programme (ESP) system (where fitted) in
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or any re- If the orange Malfunction Indicator light comes on
quest switch (where fitted), the door lock indica- the 5. Starting and driving section.
steady or blinks (where fitted) while the engine is
tor light will illuminate for 1 minute. Front fog light indicator light running, it may indicate an engine control system
malfunction.
The door lock indicator light turns off when any
door is unlocked. The light comes on when the front fog lights are See Malfunction warning light (red) (where fitted)
switched on (see Fog light switch later in this sec- earlier in this section for details of the red malfunc-
For locking or unlocking doors, see Door locks in tion).
the 3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments sec- tion warning light (where fitted).
tion. Glow plug indicator light (Diesel On steady (orange):
Electronic Stability Programme engines) An engine malfunction has been detected. Have the
(ESP) OFF indicator light This light comes on when the ignition switch is in the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
ON position and goes out when the glow plugs have workshop. You do not need to have your vehicle
(where fitted)
been pre-heated. When the engine is cold, the glow towed to the dealer.
The light comes on when the Electronic Stability plug warm-up time will be longer. Blinking (orange) (where fitted):
Programme (ESP) OFF switch is pushed to the OFF
position. This indicates that the ESP system is not High beam assist indicator light An engine misfire has been detected which may
operating. (where fitted) damage the engine control system.
This light also comes on briefly when the ignition The indicator light illuminates when the headlights To reduce or avoid engine control system dam-
switch is turned to the ON position. The light will come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO age:
turn off after approximately 1 second if the ESP sys- position with the high beam selected. This indicates
tem is operational. that the high beam assist system is operational. (See
Do not drive at speeds above 70 km/h (43
MPH).
2-36.)
When the ESP OFF indicator light and SLIP indica-
Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

Instruments and controls 2-11


Avoid steep uphill grades. SLIP indicator light AUDIBLE REMINDERS
If possible, reduce the load being carried or (where fitted) Door open reminder chime
towed. The SLIP indicator blinks when the Electronic Sta- The chime will sound if any door other than the driv-
The Malfunction Indicator light may stop blinking bility Programme (ESP) system is operating, thus ers door is left open and the power door lock switch
and come on steady. alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is is held down.
slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or Intelligent Key models: The external buzzer will
qualified workshop. You do not need to have your You may feel or hear the system working, this is nor- sound if the vehicle is being locked remotely or us-
vehicle towed to the dealer. mal. ing an outside door lock switch and any door is
CAUTION The light will continue to blink for a few seconds open.
after the ESP system stops limiting wheel spin.
Continued vehicle operation without having the Parking brake reminder buzzer
engine control system checked and repaired as For additional information see Electronic Stability
A buzzer will sound when driving away if the parking
necessary could lead to poor driveability, Programme (ESP) OFF indicator light (where
brake has not been released. Stop the vehicle and
reduced fuel economy and possible damage to fitted) earlier in this section and Electronic Stabil-
release the parking brake.
the engine control system, which may affect your ity Programme (ESP) system (where fitted) in the
warranty coverage. 5. Starting and driving section. Light reminder chime
Rear fog light indicator light Trailer direction indicator light A chime will sound for 10 seconds if the drivers
(where fitted) door is opened while the external lights are turned
The light will light up whenever an additional electri- on and the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK
The light comes on when the rear fog light is cal load is detected by the direction indicator sys- position.
switched on (see Rear fog light (where fitted) later tem.
in this section). See Headlight and turn signal switch later in this
For additional information, see Trailer towing in section for further details on the headlight operation.
Side light and headlight indicator the 5. Starting and driving section.
light Fog light reminder chime
Turn signal/hazard indicator A chime will sound if the ignition switch is in the
This light comes on when the side light or headlight lights OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is
position is selected, see Headlight and turn signal
The direction indicator lights will flash when the turn in the AUTO position (where fitted) and the fog lights
switch later in this section for further details.
signal switch or hazard warning flasher switch is are left on.
turned on. See Headlight and turn signal switch See Fog light switch later in this section for further
later in this section and see Hazard warning flasher details.
switch in the 6. In case of emergency section for
further details.

2-12 Instruments and controls


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Seat belt reminder chime The vehicle engine bonnet is open.


A chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds if When any of the above conditions continues for
the vehicles speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 MPH) and over 3 minutes the Stop/Start System buzzer will
the drivers seat belt or front passengers seat belt, sound in 5-minute intervals as a reminder to prevent
if occupied (where fitted) is not securely fastened. the possibility of a dead battery. Use the ignition
See Seat belt warnings in the 1. Safety Seats, switch to turn off the engine.
Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System sec- Close the bonnet or the drivers door, or fasten the
tion. seat belt then restart the engine using the ignition
Key reminder buzzer (Intelligent Key switch.
NIC2203
models) For more information, see [Stop/Start] in the 5. In-
struments and controls section and Stop/Start
The external buzzer will beep 3 times if:
System (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving The vehicle information display j
1 is located be-
The Intelligent Key is removed from the vehicle section. tween the tachometer and the speedometer, and it
displays such items as:
while the ignition is not in the LOCK position.
The vehicle is being locked remotely or using an Vehicle settings
outside door lock switch and the Intelligent Key
has been left inside the vehicle.
Trip computer information
Drive system warnings and settings (where fit-
Park reminder chime (where fitted) ted)
A chime will sound if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position and the shift lever is not in the P
Cruise control system information

(Park) position. NISSAN Intelligent Key operation information

Stop/Start System reminder buzzer Chassis Control


(where fitted) Indicators and warnings (where fitted)
The engine will shift to the normal stopped state if Tyre Pressure information
any of the following operations is made during Stop/
Start System activation, and the Stop/Start System
buzzer will sound if:
The drivers seat belt is unfastened and the driv-
ers door is open (MT models)

Instruments and controls 2-13


HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE STARTUP DISPLAY [Tyre Pressures]
INFORMATION DISPLAY When the ignition is placed in the ON or ACC posi- [Units]
tion the screens displayed include:
[Language]
Active system status (where fitted)
[Factory reset]
Trip computer
[Driver assistance]
Tyre pressure information Use the or switches and the ENTER button to
Fuel economy change the status, warnings or turn on or off any of
the systems/warnings displayed in the [Driver As-
Warnings
sistance] menu. The following menu options are
NIC2204
Outside air temperature available:
Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer [Driving Aids] (where fitted)
The vehicle information display can be changed us- Warnings will only display if there are any present, [Driver Attention] (where fitted)
ing the ENTER and BACK buttons located on the for more information on warnings and indicators,
left side of the steering wheel. see Vehicle information display warnings and [Traffic Sign] (where fitted)

m Back button
indicators later in this section. To control which [Parking Aids]
items display in the vehicle information display, see
Settings later in this section.
[Chassis control]:
Press the BACK button to return to the previous dis- this allows you to turn [Trace Control] and [En-
play screen or menu level, or to cancel the selection SETTINGS gine Brake] on or off.
if it is not completed. The setting mode allows you to change the informa- [Trace Control]:
m or m Display scrolling switch tion displayed in the vehicle information display:
(For more information, see Active trace
Push or to scroll through the items in the
[Driver Assistance] control in the 5. Starting and driving sec-
vehicle information display. Press ENTER to select [Clock] tion)
an item in the display, then push
through the associated menu options.
or to scroll [Display Settings] [Engine Brake]:

[Vehicle Settings] (For more information, see Active engine


brake (for XTRONIC (CVT) models only) in
[Maintenance] the 5. Starting and driving section)
[Alert]

2-14 Instruments and controls


[Steering effort]: this can be set to [Normal] or [Display settings] [Driving aids] (where fitted)
[Sport].
Use the or switches to scroll and the ENTER [Tyre pressures]
The [Driving Aids] option has a sub-menu, from button to change the status, warnings or turn on or
which you can choose whether or not to have fur- off any of the systems/warnings displayed in the
[Driver Attention] (where fitted)
ther items displayed. These items are: [Display Settings] menu. The following menu op- [Chassis control]
tions are available:
[Lane] (Lane Departure Warning system) The [Driving Aids] option has a sub-menu, from
[Blind Spot] Blind Spot Warning system) [Contents selection] which you can choose whether or not to have fur-
ther items displayed. These items are:
[Emergency Brake] (Forward Emergency Brake [Body Colour]
[Lane] (Lane Departure Warning system)
system) [ECO Mode Settings] (where fitted)
[Blind Spot] Blind Spot Warning system)
The [Driver Attention] option can be used to activate [Stop/Start]
or deactivate the Driver Attention Support feature [Emergency Brake] (Forward Emergency Brak-
(where fitted). This system is able to detect whether [ECO Drive Report] ing system)
the driver is displaying a lack of attention, or is dis- [Welcome Effect] [Body Colour]:
tracted. It does this by monitoring driving style, and
[Contents selection]: The colour of the vehicle that displays in the vehicle
steering behaviour, and it notes deviations from the
normal pattern. If the system detects that driver at- The items that display when the ignition switch is information display when the ignition switch is
tention is decreasing, the system uses an audible placed in the ON position can be enabled/disabled. placed in the ON position can be changed.
and visual warning to suggest that the driver takes a To change the items that are displayed, use the [ECO mode settings] (where fitted):
break. or buttons to scroll and the ENTER button to
select a menu item: The following items (where fit- You can choose which of the ECO mode features
[Clock] ted) are available in the [Meter Settings] menu: you wish to see displayed. These include the ECO
indicator ([ECO glow]), and from the Display sub-
For details of how to set the clock, see Setting the
clock in the 4. Display screen, heater and air con-
[Home] menu, the [Pedal Guide] and Instant fuel economy
([Fuel econ.]) display.
ditioner, and audio system section or the separate [Average speed]
NissanConnect Owners manual. [Stop/Start]:
[Trip]
The [Stop/Start] system mode shows the CO2 sav-
[Fuel economy]
ings and the engine stop time. (See Stop/Start Sys-
[Navigation] (where fitted) tem (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving
section.)
[Traffic Sign] (where fitted)
[Audio]

Instruments and controls 2-15


The following options are available in the [Stop/ From the Main Menu Selection select [ECO Drive tings] menu. The following menu options, each lead-
Start] menu: Report] to display the information when the ignition ing to a further sub-menu, are available:
switch is placed in the ON position.
[Display]: [Lighting]
You can choose whether on not to display stop/ Select [Display] then On or Off to display the infor-
start information. mation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON [Turn indicator]

[Trip CO2 saving]:


position. The ECO Drive Report is displayed when [Unlocking]
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
The [Trip CO2 saving] and engine stop time [Wipers]
mode shows the CO2 saving and engine stop You can also view the ECO drive report history. [Lighting]:
time since the last reset. The CO2 saving and [Welcome Effect]:
engine stop time can be reset by pushing ENTER The [Lighting] menu has the following options:
You can choose whether or not to display the wel-
for longer than 1 second.
come screen when the ignition switch is placed in
[Welcome light]:
[Total CO2 saving]: The welcome lighting can be set to be ON or
the ACC (where fitted) or ON position. You can
OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Wel-
The [Total CO2 saving] and engine stop time also choose the following items to define how the
come Light]. Use the ENTER button to turn this
mode shows: welcome screen looks:
feature ON or OFF. When set to ON, front and
The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre- [Dial and pointer] rear lamps will stay on for 30 seconds after un-
vented. locking. They will also stay on for 10 seconds
[Display effect]
after locking.
The engine stop time that the engine has been To enable/disable the welcome screen, and set how
stopped by the [Stop/Start] System it appears: [Int. Lamp timer]:
The internal light timer can be set to be ON or
NOTE 1. Use the or buttons to select [Settings], and OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Int. Lamp
The [Total CO2 saving] and engine stop press ENTER. timer]. Use the ENTER button to turn this feature
time values cannot be reset and show ac- ON or OFF.
2. Select [Welcome Effects] using the or but-
cumulated [Stop/Start] System informa-
tion since the vehicle was built.
tons and press ENTER to select this menu. Use [Mood lighting]:
the or buttons to navigate between the The mood lighting can be dimmed or brightened.
[ECO Drive Report]: menu options and press ENTER to turn each From the [Lighting] menu, select [Mood light-
function ON or OFF. ing]. Use the ENTER button and the or
You can choose whether or not to display ECO switches to adjust the brightness.
information in the vehicle information display when [Vehicle settings]
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Use the or switches and the ENTER button to
change the status, warnings or turn on or off any of
the systems/warnings displayed in the [Vehicle set-

2-16 Instruments and controls


[Auto lights]: pushed again within 1 minute. When this item is
The sensitivity of the automatic lighting can be turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked when
adjusted. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Auto the door handle request switch is pushed once.
Lights]. Use the or and ENTER switches to From the [Unlocking] menu, select [Selective
select the required sensitivity. The following op- Unlock]. Use the ENTER button to activate or
tions are available: deactivate this function.
On earliest [Wipers]:
On earlier [Speed dependent] (where fitted)
The Speed dependent wiper feature can be set
Standard to be ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu,
On later select [Speed Dependent]. Use the ENTER but-
ton to turn this feature ON or OFF.
[Turn indicator]:
The [3 flash on] overtaking feature can be set to be [Rain Sensor] (where fitted)
The [Rain sensor] feature can be activated or
ON or OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select
deactivated. From the [Wipers] menu, select
[3 Flash on]. Use the ENTER button to turn this
[Rain Sensor]. Use the ENTER button to turn
feature ON or OFF.
this feature ON or OFF.
[Unlocking]:
There are two options (where fitted) in the [Unlock-
[Reverse link]
The [Reverse link] wiper feature can be set to be
ing] menu: ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select
[IKey Door Lock] (where fitted) [Reverse Link]. Use the ENTER button to turn
this feature ON or OFF.
When this item is turned on, the request switch NIC2206
on the door is activated. From the [Unlocking] [Drip wipe]
menu, select [I-Key Door Unlock]. Use the The [Drip wipe] feature can be set to be ON or
ENTER button to activate or deactivate this func- OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select [Drip
Maintenance
tion. Wipe]. Use the ENTER button to turn this fea- 1. Engine oil and filter replacement indicator:
[Selective unlock] ture ON or OFF. This indicator appears when the customer set time
When this item is turned on, and the door handle comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You
request switch on the drivers or front passen- can set or reset the distance for changing the en-
gers side door is pushed, only the correspond- gine oil and filter.
ing door is unlocked. All the doors can be un-
locked if the door handle request switch is

Instruments and controls 2-17


NOTE menu, use the or buttons to navigate be- [Navigation] (where fitted)
tween the menu options and press ENTER to set
Diesel models with diesel engines make use of
or reset the distance for replacing tyres. [Phone]
an Oil Condition Supervisor (OCS) function.
Petrol engines have a basic service reminder. [Mail] (where fitted)
WARNING To set an alert:
1. Use the or buttons to select [Settings], and
press ENTER. The tyre replacement indicator is not a substitute 1. Use the or buttons to select the item re-
for regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure quired, and press ENTER.
2. Select [Maintenance], followed by [Service] us- checks. See Wheels and tyres in the 8. Main-
ing the or and ENTER switches. In the tenance and do-it-yourself section. Many factors 2. For [Phone], [Navigation] or [Mail] use the
[Service] menu, use the or buttons to navi- including tyre inflation, alignment, driving habits ENTER button to toggle between YES and NO.
gate between the menu options and press and road conditions affect tyre wear and when For the [Timer], to change the timer value, use
ENTER to set or reset the distance for changing tyres should be replaced. Setting the tyre re- the or buttons and the ENTER button to
the engine oil. placement indicator for a certain driving distance save the selected length of time.
3. (Diesel models only) Select [Maintenance], fol- does not mean your tyres will last that long. Use [Tyre pressures]
lowed by [Filter] using the or and ENTER the tyre replacement indicator as a guide only
and always perform regular tyre checks. Failure The settings in the Tyre pressures] menu are all
switches. In the [Filter] menu, use the or
to perform regular tyre checks, including tyre related to the Tyre pressure monitoring system
buttons to navigate between the menu options
pressure checks could result in tyre failure. Seri- TPMS (see Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
and press ENTER to set or reset the distance for
ous vehicle damage could occur and may lead to (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and driving section).
draining the diesel fuel filter.
a collision, which could result in serious personal [Target front]
For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see injury or death.
your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.
3. Other indicator:
[Target rear]
2. Tyre replacement indicator:
This indicator appears when the customer set time
[Tyre pressure unit]
This indicator appears when the customer set dis- comes for replacing items other than the engine oil, [Calibrate]
tance comes for replacing tyres. You can set or fuel filter and tyres. You can set or reset the dis- [Target front]:
reset the distance for replacing tyres. tance for replacing the items.
The [target front] tyre pressure is the pressure speci-
1. Use the or buttons to select [Settings], and [Alert] fied for the front tyres on the tyre placard (see Tyre
press ENTER.
You can specify that an alert occurs to notify the placard in the 9. Technical information section
2. Select [Maintenance], followed by [Tyre] using driver that a certain event has occurred. You can set and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in
the or and ENTER switches. In the [Tyre] alerts for the following items: the 5. Starting and driving section).

[Timer]

2-18 Instruments and controls


Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select Pressure units conversion table
and change the value for the [target front] tyre pres-
sure. kPa 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340
psi 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 46 48 49
[Target rear]:
bar 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
The [target rear] tyre pressure is the pressure speci-
kgf/ 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
fied for the rear tyres on the tyre placard (see Tyre
cm2
placard in the 9. Technical information section
and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in
the 5. Starting and driving section).
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the value for the [target rear] tyre pres-
sure.
[Tyre pressure unit]:
The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the vehicle
information display can be changed to:
Kgf/cm2
kPa
bar
psi
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.

Instruments and controls 2-19


[Calibrate]: Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select [Dutch]
and change the unit.
The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of [Spanish]
the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the [Tyre pressures]:
vehicle is driven. The TPMS system uses tempera- [Turkish]
The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the vehicle
ture sensors in the tyres to compensate for changes information display can be changed to: [Russian]
in temperature in order to prevent false TPMS warn-
Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select
ings. Kgf/cm2
and change the language of the vehicle information
The [CALIBRATE] function resets the previously kPa display.
stored temperature value. It is recommended that
this function is performed after the tyre pressures
bar [Factory reset]
are adjusted. psi The settings in the vehicle information display can
See Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in Use the or and the ENTER buttons to select be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
the 5. Starting and driving section and change the unit. vehicle information display:

Use the or and the ENTER buttons to start or [Temperature]: 1. Use the or buttons to select [Settings], and
cancel the calibration process. While the calibration press the ENTER button
The temperature that displays in the vehicle informa-
process is active, the message: [Resetting tyre pres- tion display can be changed from: 2. Select [Factory Reset] using the or buttons
sure system] will be displayed. and press the ENTER button
C (Celsius)
[Units] 3. Select [YES] to return all settings back to default
F (Fahrenheit)
by pressing the ENTER button
[Distance/Fuel]
Use the ENTER button to toggle choices.
[Tyre pressures]
[Language]
[Temperature]
The [language] of the vehicle information display
[Distance/Fuel]: can be changed to:
The unit for the distance and fuel consumption that
displays in the vehicle information display can be
[English]

changed to: [French]

miles, MPG [German]

km, km/l [Italian]

km, l/100km [Portuguese]

2-20 Instruments and controls


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

NIC2331

Instruments and controls 2-21


1. Engine start operation indicator (for
XTRONIC transmission models)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
This indicator indicates that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
2. Engine start operation indicator (for
Manual Transmission (MT) models)
This indicator indicates that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal
depressed.
You can also start the engine by pushing the ignition
switch with the brake pedal depressed when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3. [NO KEY Detected] warning
The warning appears when the door is closed with
the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the
ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Make
sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
See Intelligent Key system (where fitted) in the
3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments section for
more details.
4. [Key System Fault] warning
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the
Intelligent Key system.

NIC2332

2-22 Instruments and controls


If this warning appears while the engine is stopped, 8. [Release parking brake] warning 12. [SHIFT to Park] warning (XTRONIC
the engine cannot be started. If this warning ap- transmission models)
pears while the engine is running, the vehicle can be This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
driven. However, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali- above 7 km/h (4 MPH) and the parking brake is This warning appears when the ignition switch is
fied workshop for repair as soon as possible. applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any
brake. This warning may a occur if the driver has position except the P (Park) position.
5. [Key battery low] indicator attempted to release the parking brake automati-
cally, but did not succeed. If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat- (Park) position or place the ignition switch in the ON
tery is running out of power. 9. Low fuel ([Range]) warning position.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank An inside warning chime will also sound. (See
new one. (See Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, Push-button ignition switch (where fitted) in the
battery replacement in the 8. Maintenance and preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty 5. Starting and driving section.)
do-it-yourself section.) (0) position.
13. [Loose Fuel Cap] warning
6. [Key ID Incorrect] warning There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the
tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not
This warning appears when the ignition switch is tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refu-
pushed from the LOCK position and the Intelligent position.
elled. See Fuel filler lid in the 3. Pre-driving
Key cannot be recognised by the system. You can- 10. [Low washer fluid] warning checks and adjustments section section of this
not start the engine with an unregistered key. Use manual.
the registered Intelligent Key. See Intelligent Key This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is
system (where fitted) in the 3. Pre-driving checks at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See 14. [Battery Voltage Low Charge
and adjustments section. Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid (where Battery] warning
fitted) in the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself
7. Engine start operation for Intelligent section.) This warning appears when the battery voltage is
Key system indicator low and the battery needs to be charged.
11. Door/boot open warning
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat- 15. [Press Brake Pedal] warning
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the
tery is running out of power and the Intelligent Key This warning appears to remind you that you must
boot lid are open or not closed securely. The vehicle
system and vehicle are not communicating normally. press the brake pedal before you can release the
icon indicates which door or whether the boot lid is
If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch open on the display. parking brake. This warning may also be displayed
with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake if the parking brake is activated, but the vehicle is
pedal. (See Push-button ignition switch (where still rolling back.
fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving section.)

Instruments and controls 2-23


16. [Low Tyre Pressure] warning 18. [Oil Level Low] warning 21. [4WD tyre size incorrect] warning
This warning ([Low Tyre Pressure] and a vehicle This warning appears in message area of the ve- This warning may appear if there is a large differ-
icon - where fitted) appears when the low tyre pres- hicle information display if the oil level is not suffi- ence between the diameters of the front and rear
sure warning light in the meter illuminates and low cient for driving. Park the vehicle at a safe location wheels and tyres. Pull off the road in a safe area,
tyre pressure is detected. The warning appears each as soon as possible and use the dipstick to check with the engine idling. Check that all the tyre sizes
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Maintenance are the same, that tyre pressures are correct and
as long as the low tyre pressure warning light re- and do-it-yourself section If the oil level is not suf- that the tyres are not excessively worn.
mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the ficient for driving, top up the engine oil with the rec-
vehicle and adjust the pressure to the recommended ommended engine oil. Engine oil in the 8. Main- 22. [Shipping mode on push storage
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre placard. tenance and do-it-yourself section.) fuse] warning
(See Low tyre pressure warning light (where fitted) This warning may appear if the extended storage
CAUTION
earlier in this section and Tyre Pressure Monitoring fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When
System (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and driving sec- The oil level should be checked regularly using this warning appears, push in (switch on) the ex-
tion.) the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi- tended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning.
cient amount of oil can damage the engine and For more information, see Fuses in the 8. Main-
17. [Low oil pressure stop vehicle] such damage is not covered by the warranty. tenance and do-it-yourself section.
warning
19. [4WD System Fault] warning 23. [Power will turn off to save the
This warning appears in message area of the ve-
hicle information display if low oil pressure is de- This warning appears when the four wheel drive battery] warning
tected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low (4WD) system is not functioning properly while the This warning appears after a period of time if the
oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not de- engine is running. shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) position
signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to 20. [4WD high temp. stop vehicle] while the ignition is in the ON position for a certain
check the oil level. See Engine oil in the 8. Main- period of time.
tenance and do-it-yourself section.)
warning
This warning may appear while trying to free a stuck 24. [Power turned off to save the
CAUTION
vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driv- battery] warning
The oil level should be checked regularly using ing mode may change to Two-Wheel Drive (2WD). This warning appears after the ignition switch is au-
the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi- If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the tomatically turned OFF to save the battery.
cient amount of oil can damage the engine and engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if
such damage is not covered by the warranty. the warning turns off, you can continue driving.

2-24 Instruments and controls


25. [Reminder turn off headlights] 29. Cruise control indicator 33. [Resetting Tyre Pressure System]
warning This indicator shows the cruise control system sta- indicator
This warning appears when the driver side door is tus. The status is shown by the colour. This warning illuminates when the TPMS tempera-
opened while the headlight switch is left ON and the See Cruise control (where fitted) in the 5. Start- ture calibration is in progress. See TPMS tempera-
ignition switch is placed in the ACC, OFF or ing and driving section for details. ture calibration in the 5. Starting and driving sec-
LOCK position. Place the headlight switch in OFF tion for further details.
or AUTO position. For additional information, see 30. Speed limiter indicator
Headlight and turn signal switch later in this sec- 34. [Parking Sensor System Fault]
This indicator shows the status of the speed limiter warning (where fitted)
tion. system . If the system is in turned on and in use, the
26. [Time for a driver break?] indicator speed that the speed limiter is set to is also dis- This warning illuminates when there is a problem
played. with the parking sensor system. If this warning
This indicator appears when the set TIMER indi- comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN
cator activates. You can set the time for up to 6 See Speed limiter (where fitted) in the 5. Starting dealer or qualified workshop.
hours. and driving section for details.
35. [Vehicle Overheating Stop Vehicle]
27. [Low outside temperature] warning 31. Shift lever position indicator
warning
This warning appears if the outside temperature is This indicator shows the shift lever position.
This warning illuminates is the engine coolant tem-
below 3C (37F). The warning can be set not to be See Shift lever indicator (where fitted) in the perature is too high, indicating that the engine is
displayed. (See [Clock] and [outside air 5. Starting and driving section for further details. overheating. See Engine overheat in the 6. In
temperature] later in this section or the separate case of emergency section for further details.
NissanConnect Owners manual.) 32. [Tyre Pressure System Fault]
warning 36. [CVT System Fault] warning
28. [Chassis control system fault] (where fitted)
warning This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). This warning illuminates when there is a problem
This warning appears if the chassis control module If this warning comes on, have the system checked with the XTRONIC transmission (CVT) system. If
detects an error in the Chassis Control System by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See this warning comes on, have the system checked by
(where fitted). Have the system checked by a Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. (See Chas- 5. Starting and driving section for further details.
sis control in the 5. Starting and driving section.)

Instruments and controls 2-25


37. [Adaptive Front-Lighting System 47. [Please Select Driving Aids in 5354. [Not Available High Cabin
Fault] warning (where fitted) Settings Menu] warning Temperature] warning (where fitted)
This warning illuminates when there is a problem This warning is displayed if the Driving Aids items This warning appears if the interior temperature of
with the dynamic high beam assistant system. See are not available because they are turned off in the the vehicle has reached such a high temperature
Dynamic high beam assistant (where fitted) later Settings menu. that the sensor for the Traffic Sign Recognition and
in this section. If this warning comes on, have the Lane Departure warning systems can no longer
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified 4851. [System Fault] warning function reliably. Once the interior temperature has
workshop. This warning appears when the Blind Spot Warn- reached normal levels, the warning should disap-
ing, (where fitted), Lane Departure Warning (where pear. If the warning continues to display, have the
38. [Headlight System Fault] warning fitted), Traffic Sign Recognition (where fitted), or system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
(where fitted) Forward Emergency Braking systems (where fitted) workshop
This warning illuminates when the LED headlights are not functioning properly.
55. [Not Available Clean Rear Camera]
need to be replaced. If this warning comes on, have
52. [Not Available Front Radar warning (where fitted)
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop. See LED headlight (where fitted) Obstruction] warning (where fitted) This message is displayed if the rear camera used
later in this section If the sensor area of the front bumper is covered by the Blind Spot Warning system is dirty or cov-
with dirt or obstructed, making it impossible to de- ered with snow or rain. If the message appears,
3945. [Stop/Start] System tect a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency brak- park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine,
These indicators show the Stop/Start System sta- ing system is automatically turned off. The forward and clean the camera unit with a soft cloth. Then
tus. See Stop/Start System (where fitted) in the emergency braking system warning light (orange) restart the engine.
5. Starting and driving section. and the forward collision warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the [Not Available Front Radar Ob-
56. [Steering lock Registration
46. [Push Ignition to OFF] warning struction] warning message will appear in the ve- Complete] indicator
This warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is hicle information display. If the [Not Available Front This appears when a new intelligent key is regis-
placed in the ACC position when the shift lever is Radar Obstruction] warning message appears, park tered to the vehicle.
moved to the P (Park) position. To turn off the Push the vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position Check to see if the sensor area of the front bumper 57. [Please select 1 item or more]
and then in the LOCK position. is blocked. If the sensor area of the front bumper is indicator
blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the This message appears when you are in the main
engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, menu of the vehicle information display to remind
have the forward emergency braking system you to select at least one item.
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

2-26 Instruments and controls


TRIP COMPUTER

NIC2204

NIC2228

Switches for the trip computer are located on the


left side of the steering wheel and on the switch
panel j 1 . To operate the trip computer, push the
switches as shown above.
Each time the or switch is pushed, the display
will change.

NIC2271

Instruments and controls 2-27


1. [Fuel economy] (l (litre)/100 km, 3. [Range] (dte km or mile) [Trip distance]:
km/l(litre) or MPG) The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with The trip odometer mode shows the total distance
Current fuel consumption: an estimation of the distance that can be driven the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
before refuelling. The dte is constantly being calcu- Push the ENTER switch for longer than 1 second to
The current fuel consumption mode shows the cur- enter the Reset menu. (The elapsed time is also
lated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
rent fuel consumption. reset at the same time.)
and the actual fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption:
The display is updated every 30 seconds. 5. Navigation (where fitted)
The average fuel consumption mode shows the av-
The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. When the route guidance is set in the navigation
erage fuel consumption since the last reset. Push
If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on system, this item shows the navigation route infor-
the ENTER switch for longer than 1 second to enter
the screen. mation.
the Reset menu.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte dis- For more details, see the separately provided Nis-
The display is updated every 30 seconds. For about
play will change to . sanConnect Owners manual.
the first 500 m (1/3 mile) after a reset, the display
shows . If the amount of fuel added is small, the display 6. Audio
Push ENTER briefly to show the second Fuel just before the ignition switch is placed in the The audio mode shows the status of audio informa-
Economy page. OFF position may continue to be displayed. tion.
2. [Speed] and [Average speed] (km/h When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel
For more details, see FM AM radio with CD player
in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change
or MPH) (where fitted) in the 4. Display screen, heater and
the display.
air conditioner, and audio system section or the
The (digital) speed shows the current speed at separately provided NissanConnect Owners
which the vehicle is travelling.
4. Elapsed [time] and [trip distance] (km
or mile) manual.
The average speed mode shows the average ve-
hicle speed since the last reset. Push the ENTER Elapsed [time]: 7. [Driving aids] (where fitted)
switch for longer than 1 second to enter the Reset The elapsed time mode shows the time since the The driving aids mode shows the operating condi-
menu. last reset. Push the ENTER switch for longer than 1 tion for the following systems.
second to enter the Reset menu. (The trip odometer
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first
is also reset at the same time.)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
30 seconds after a reset, the display shows .
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Forward Emergency Braking
Push ENTER to access the driving aids setting
menu.

2-28 Instruments and controls


For more details, see Blind Spot Warning (BSW) [Trip CO2 saving] and engine stop time: [CLOCK] AND [OUTSIDE AIR
system (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving The trip CO2 saving and engine stop time mode TEMPERATURE]
section, Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system shows the CO2 saving and engine stop time since
(where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving sec- the last reset.
tion, and/or Forward emergency braking system
(where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving sec- The CO2 saving and engine stop time can be reset
tion. by pushing the ENTER switch for longer than 1 sec-
ond.
8. [Tyre pressures] (where fitted)
[Total CO2 saving] and engine stop time:
The tyre pressure mode shows the pressure of all
The total CO2 saving and engine stop time mode
four tyres. The displayed values are only available
shows:
while the vehicle is being driven.
When the [Low Tyre Pressure] warning appears, The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions JVI0724XZ

prevented.
the display can be switched to the tyre pressure
mode by pushing the ENTER switch to reveal addi- The engine stop time that the engine has been The clock j 1 and outside air temperature j 2 are
tional details on the displayed warning. stopped by the Stop/Start System. displayed on the upper side of the vehicle informa-
tion display.
9. [Chassis control] NOTE
[Clock]
When either the Active Trace Control (where fitted), The Total CO2 saving and engine stop time val-
Active Engine Brake (where fitted), Hill start Assist ues cannot be reset and show accumulated For details of how to set the clock, see Setting the
(where fitted) or the Active Ride Control system is Stop/Start System information since the vehicle clock in the 4. Display screen, heater and air con-
operated, it shows the operating condition. See was built. ditioner, and audio system section or the sepa-
Chassis control in the 5. Starting and driving rately provided NissanConnect Owners manual.
section and Hill Start Assist (HSA) system in the 11. Warning check
5. Starting and driving section for more details.
[Outside air temperature] (C or F)
The current warnings are displayed. If no warning is
present, No Warnings is displayed. The [outside air temperature] is displayed in C or
10. [Stop/Start] system (where fitted) F in the range of 40 to 60C (40 to 140F).
The Stop/Start system mode shows the CO2 sav- The outside temperature sensor is located in front of
ings and the engine stop time. (See Stop/Start Sys- the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or
tem (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and driving engine heat, wind directions and other driving con-
section.) ditions. The display may differ from the actual out-
side temperature or the temperature displayed on
various signs or billboards.

Instruments and controls 2-29


TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION The traffic recognition system displays the following
WARNING types of road sign:
(where fitted)
The TSR system is only intended to be a support
device to provide the driver with information. It is
not a replacement for the drivers attention to
traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely.
It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness.
It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert and
drive safely at all times.
System operation

NSD522

The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides


the driver with information about the most recently
detected speed limit. The system captures the road
sign information with the multi-sensing front camera
unit j1 located in front of the interior rear-view mir-
ror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle
information display. For vehicles equipped with NIC2207
NissanConnect, the speed limit displayed is based
on a combination of navigation system data and live
camera recognition. TSR information is always dis-
played at the top of the vehicle information display,
and optionally in the main central area of the display NIC2242

screen. See [Contents selection] earlier in this TSR: available road signs

section for details of how to adapt the display of j


A Latest detected speed limit.
TSR information.
j
B National speed limit
j
C No speed limit information.
j
D No-overtaking zone.
j
E End of no-overtaking zone.

2-30 Instruments and controls


j
F Conditional speed limit, with the following In areas not covered by the navigation sys- System Malfunction
available conditions: tem.
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be turned off
j
g Snow If there are deviations in relation to the automatically and the system [Malfunction]/[System
navigation, for example due to changes in
j
h Slip (rain 1)
the road routing.
error] warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
j
i Rain (rain 2)
When overtaking buses or trucks with Action to take:
j
j Towing speed stickers.
If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System error] message
j
k Generic Turning the TSR system on and off appears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop
CAUTION Turning the LDW system on or of is done using the the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the en-
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display. gine. If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System error] mes-
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system is
For details, see Vehicle information display in the sage continues to appear, have the system checked
intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the by a NISSAN dealer.
drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive 2. Instruments and controls section.
safely, and observe all road regulations that Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Maintenance
currently apply, including looking out for road TSR system: The TSR uses the same multi-sensing front camera
signs. unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning
1. In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assis-
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system tance] key. (LDW) system, located in front of the interior rear
may not function properly under the following view mirror. For maintenance of the camera, see
conditions: 2. Touch [Traffic Sign] to turn the system ON/OFF. Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance in the
System temporarily unavailable 5. Starting and driving section.
When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windscreen in front of the TSR camera unit. If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
When the headlights are not bright due to temperature conditions (over approximately 40 C
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad- (104 F) and then started, the TSR system may be
justed properly. deactivated automatically. The [Not available high
cabin temperature] warning message will appear in
When strong light enters the camera unit. the vehicle information display.
(For example, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun- Action to take:
set.) When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR
When a sudden change in brightness oc- system will resume operating automatically.
curs. (For example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

Instruments and controls 2-31


WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

WARNING
WINDSCREEN Wiper operation
Move the lever up or down to operate the wiper at
In freezing temperatures the washer fluid may
the following speeds:
freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi-
sion. Warm the windscreen with the defogger be- j1 : Intermittent ( ) Type A or AUTO
fore you wash it. Type B (where fitted) operates the rain-sensing
auto wiper system. (See Rain sensor (where
CAUTION
fitted) later in this section.).
Do not open/release the bonnet when the
The intermittent operation speed can be ad-
front wiper arms are raised from their original
justed by rotating the ring forward j
A (slower)
position.
NIC2125
or backward j B (faster).
Do not operate the washer continuously for Type A (without AUTO mode) The wiper operation speed will vary in accor-
more than 15 seconds.
dance with the vehicle speed in the AUTO
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir position. For example, when the vehicle
tank is empty or frozen. speed is high, the intermittent operation
speed will be faster.
j2 : Low ( ) for continuous low speed op-
eration
j
3 : High ( ) for continuous high speed
operation

NIC2173
j
4 : for a single sweep operation of the wiper.
Type B (with AUTO mode) Washer operation
The windscreen wiper and washer can be operated Pull the lever towards you j5 to operate the washer.
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. For every fifth operation of the wiper and washer,
the headlight washing system (where fitted) will be
activated to clean the headlights. The headlight
washing system is only activated while the headlight
switch is in the position. See Headlight
cleaner (where fitted) later in this section.

2-32 Instruments and controls


Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted): is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch Wiper operation
The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds is in the ON position. This can cause an injury
or a wiper damage. Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent ( ,
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe j1 ) position or continuous ( ,j 2 ) position for
washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen. REAR WINDOW wiper operation.
Rain sensor (where fitted) To stop the wiper operation, turn the switch back to
The sensor of the rain-sensing auto wiper system the OFF position.
located on the upper part of the windscreen, in front Washer operation:
of the rear view mirror, can automatically turn on the
To operate the washer, push the lever towards the
wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on
front of the vehicle j3 until the desired amount of
the rainfall intensity and the vehicle speed when the
washer fluid is spread on the rear window. The wiper
lever in the AUTO position j 1.
will automatically operate several times.
The sensitivity can be adjusted by rotating the ring
Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted):
of the wiper switch forward jA less sensitive, or
backward j
NIC2174
B more sensitive. The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe
NOTE washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen.
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper
In freezing temperatures the washer solution The mode can be turned off. For details, see Ve-
system when the car is in the car wash. hicle information display later in this section.
may freeze on the rear window and obscure your
Leaving the lever in AUTO position will not vision. Warm the rear window with the rear win- Reverse synchronisation function
harm the rain sensor system, although occa- dow defogger before using the rear wipers.
sional unexpected activation of the wipers
(where fitted)
CAUTION When the windscreen wiper switch is in either the
may occur.
If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the Do not operate the washer continuously for intermittent or AUTO (where fitted), low or high
more than 15 seconds. speed position, placing the shift lever in the R (Re-
wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
verse) position will operate the rear window wiper.
fingerprints, oil film or insects are covering Do not operate the washer if the reservoir
the windscreen of the rain sensor location. tank is empty or frozen. The mode can be turned off. For details, see Ve-
The wipers may also operate when exhaust hicle information display later in this section.
The rear window wiper and washer operates when
gas or moisture affects the rain sensor.
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Do not touch or cover the windscreen where
the rain sensor is located. The wipers may
operate unexpectedly when the wiper switch

Instruments and controls 2-33


THERMACLEAR HEATED
WINDSCREEN BUTTON

NOTE THERMACLEAR HEATED If damage occurs to the windscreen have the


WINDSCREEN (where fitted) ThermaClear system checked by a NISSAN
In the AUTO position (where fitted), the rear wiper
dealer or qualified workshop.
will not begin to sweep when the shift lever is
placed in the R position. It waits until the front The ThermaClear Heated Windscreen perfor-
wipers have made the first sweep. mance may be reduced or deactivated to pre-
serve the battery.
NISSAN recommends using the ThermaClear
system to support defogging of the
windscreen. For more information, see
Heater and air conditioner operation in the
4. Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
NIC2220 and audio system section.
Models with ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where fitted)
During use of the ThermaClear system the
j
A ThermaClear Heated Windscreen On/Off Stop/Start System is unavailable.
To defog/defrost the windscreen glass, start the
engine and push the ThermaClear button j A . The
indicator light will come on. Push the button again to
turn the ThermaClear system off.
The ThermaClear system will turn off automatically
after approximately 4 minutes if the windscreen
clears before this time, push the button again to turn
the ThermaClear system off.
NOTE
Before activating the ThermaClear system
make sure to remove excess snow/ice from
the windscreen
Electrical conductors embedded in the wind-
screen provide the heating of the windscreen.

2-34 Instruments and controls


DEFOGGER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER NOTE


When the ThermaClear system is turned on the
Stop/Start System (where fitted) will not be acti-
vated.
OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFOGGER
(where fitted)
The outside rear-view mirrors will be defogged when
the rear defogger switch is activated.
NIC2184

NIC2214 Models with automatic air conditioning and without


ThermaClear system
Models with manual air conditioning (where fitted)
j
A ThermaClear system On/Off. See
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button
earlier in this section.
j
B Rear window defogger On/Off
To defog/defrost the rear window glass, start the
engine and push the rear window defogger switch
jB . The indicator light will come on. Push the switch
again to turn the defogger off.
The defogger will turn off automatically after ap-
NIC2183 proximately 15 minutes if the rear window clears
Models with automatic air conditioning and ThermaClear before this time, push the switch again to turn the
system (where fitted) defogger off.
For more information, see Heater and air condi-
tioner operation in the 4. Display screen, heater
and air conditioner, and audio system section.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window,
be careful not to scratch or damage the electri-
cal conductors.

Instruments and controls 2-35


HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

NISSAN recommends you to consult the local regu- Daytime light system (where fitted) To disable the autolight system:
lations concerning the use of lights. Turn the switch to the OFF, or position.
Even if the headlight switch is off, the front daytime
HEADLIGHT SWITCH running lights will come on when the engine is run- High beam select
ning.
When the light switch is turned to the or
position, the daytime running lights will turn off.
Autolight system (AUTO where fitted)

NIC2175
NIC2120

Lighting
j
1 To select the high beam when in the
Turn the switch to the m position: position, push the lever forward. The high
The front side, tail, number plate and instru- beam lights come on and the indicator
NIC2175
m ment lights will come on. The indicator light light illuminates.

m in the instrument panel will come on. The autolight system allows the headlights to be set j
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam
so they turn on and off automatically. When active, ( position).
Turn the switch to the m position: the autolight system will: j
3 Pulling the lever towards you will flash the
The headlights will come on and all the headlight high beam, even when the headlight
m other lights remain on. Turn on the headlights, front side, tail, number
switch is off.
plate and instrument panel lights automatically
CAUTION when it gets dark.

Never leave the light switch on for extended peri- Turn off all the lights when it gets light.
ods of time while the engine is not running. To activate the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

2-36 Instruments and controls


Precautions: High beam turns off automatically:
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 km/h (15
WARNING MPH) or other road users are detected.
The High beam light (blue) turns off.
The dynamic high beam assistant cannot com-
pensate for road and weather circumstances To disable the dynamic high beam assistant:
while driving. The system saves the driver from To turn the dynamic high beam assistant off turn the
having to operate the switch. The driver always head light switch to the OFF, , or posi-
remains responsible for choosing the correct tion.
light setting.
Specific situations in which to operate the head Friendly Lighting
light switch manually: The Friendly Lighting function is a convenience
In heavy rain, snowy conditions. (general poor facility. It allows you to provide lighting from the
visibility and bad weather conditions). vehicle after the ignition switch has been turned to
the LOCK position and the headlight switch is in the
When the vehicle sensors are dirty, covered OFF or AUTO (where fitted) position. Pulling the
or broken. headlight switch toward you once will activate the
Dynamic high beam assistant activated: headlight for approximately 30 seconds. After that
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, period of time, it will automatically switch off.
the light sensor detects darkness, and the vehicle It is possible to pull the headlight switch up to four
speed is over 20 km/h (15 MPH), the dynamic high times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.
beam assistant is operational. The dynamic high
beam assistant indicator light in the instrument NOTE
NIC2211 panel is on. The Friendly Lighting function can be cancelled
The system operates as follows: by switching the ignition switch to the Acc or ON
position again.
DYNAMIC HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT High beam comes on automatically in dark con-
(where fitted) ditions: Battery save function
If the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH)
A camera-controlled high beam assistant which and no other road users are recognised. The battery save feature prevents your vehicle from
changes from low beam to high beam automatically. The high beam light (blue) comes on addi- discharging the battery after you have left the exter-
tionally. nal lights, map lamps or room lamps on when exit-
ing the vehicle. This occurs when the ignition switch
or ignition knob is switched to the OFF or LOCK
position after the engine has been running.

Instruments and controls 2-37


FOG LIGHT SWITCH

NOTE TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FRONT FOG LIGHT (where fitted)


The next time the engine is started the external
lights, map lamps or room lamp will come on
again
Battery save function for external lights:
If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position
after driving but the external lights are accidentally
left on, the external lights will automatically be
switched off as soon as the drivers door is opened.
It is possible to leave the external lights on perma- NIC2121 NIC2122
nently by switching them back on using the head- Type A: Rear fog light only
light switch while the ignition switch is still in the
LOCK or OFF position. In this case, the light re- Lane change signal
minder chime will sound when the drivers door is Move the lever only part of the way up or down j 1
opened. to signal a lane change (right or left). The indicator
Battery save function for interior light: lights will flash three times before cancelling auto-
matically.
The interior light will automatically be switched off
after a period of time if it has been accidentally left NOTE
on.
This feature will only work if the 3 flash turn sig-
nal setting has been set to ON in the Vehicle Set-
tings menu of the vehicle information display (see NIC2176
[Vehicle settings] earlier in this section). Type B: Front and rear fog lights

Direction indicator The front fog lights should only be used when visibil-
ity is seriously reduced generally, to less than 100
Move the lever up or down j 2 to indicate right or m (328 ft).
left. When the turn is completed, the turn signal is
automatically cancelled.

2-38 Instruments and controls


HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL

To turn the front fog lights on, turn the headlight If the front fog lights (where fitted) are already turned HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
switch to the or or AUTO (where fitted) on with the headlight switch in the position, SWITCH (where fitted)
position and turn the fog light switch to the posi- you can turn on the rear fog light without first turn-
tion. The front fog lights and indicator light will come ing the headlight switch to the or AUTO (where
on. The fog light switch will return to the OFF fitted) position.
position ( ). For additional information, see Warn-
To turn the rear fog light off, turn the fog light switch
ing/indicator lights and audible reminders earlier in
to the position again.
this section.
NOTE
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the position again. The front fog lights If the headlight switch is turned to the OFF po-
and indicator light will turn off. The fog light switch sition ( ), the rear fog light will switch off auto-
will return to the OFF position. matically.
NIC2200
NOTE LHD models

If the headlight switch is turned to the OFF po-


sition ( ), the front fog light will switch off auto-
matically.
REAR FOG LIGHT (where fitted)
The rear fog light should only be used when visibility
is seriously reduced generally, to less than 100 m
(328 ft).
To turn the rear fog light on, turn the headlight switch
to the or or AUTO (where fitted) position NIC2201
and turn the fog light switch to the position. The RHD models
rear fog light and indicator light will come on. The
Depending on the number of occupants in the ve-
fog light switch will return to the OFF position (
hicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis
). For additional information, see Warning/indicator
may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is travel-
lights and audible reminders earlier in this section.
ling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the
rear-view mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-
screen of an oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be

Instruments and controls 2-39


HEADLIGHT CLEANER
(where fitted)

lowered using the switch located on the drivers To clean the headlights, pull the windscreen washer Do not operate the cleaner if the washer fluid
side of the instrument panel, next to the steering switch towards you while the headlight switch is in reservoir is empty or frozen.
wheel. the position and the ignition switch is in the ON
See Window washer fluid/headlight cleaner fluid
position.
The higher the number designated on the switch, (where fitted) in the 8. Maintenance and
the lower the axis. NOTE do-it-yourself section for details on refilling the res-
ervoir tank.
When travelling with no heavy load on a flat road, The headlight cleaner will automatically operate
select position 0. every fifth operation of the wiper and washer
switch.
AUTOMATIC AIMING CONTROL (LED
headlights) HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
Vehicles with LED headlights are equipped with an (where fitted)
automatic levelling system. The headlight axis is con-
trolled automatically.
NISSAN recommends consulting local regulations
on the use of lights.

SIC2255Z
Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted)

The headlight cleaner operates when the headlight


and turn signal switch is in the position and the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
To operate the headlight cleaner push the headlight
cleaner switch located on the drivers side, lower
left side of the instrument panel.
CAUTION
Do not operate the cleaner continuously for
more than 15 seconds.

2-40 Instruments and controls


HORN SEAT HEATING (where fitted)

4. The seat heater switches illuminate when either


heat setting is selected and will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
5. When the vehicles interior has warmed-up, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
seat heater system off.
CAUTION
Do not use the seat heater system for a long
NIC2198 NIC2199
period of time when the engine is not running,
otherwise the battery could run down.

To sound the horn, push the centre pad area j


1 of The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. Do not put anything on the seat that insulates
the steering wheel. the heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
The switches are located on the centre console and cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may overheat.
can be operated independently from each other (j A
for the left-hand side seat, j
B for the right-hand side Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
seat). seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may damage the heater.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE
Any liquid spilled on a heated seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth.
The seat heater can only be activated when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When cleaning the seat, never use benzine,
thinner or any similar materials.
2. Start the engine.
If any abnormalities are found or the heating
3. Select the heat range: does not operate, turn off the switch and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
Press the forward part of the switch (HI) j
1 qualified workshop.
to activate the HIGH heat setting.
Press the rear part of the switch (LO) j
2 to
activate the LOW heat setting.
For no heat, the switch has a central OFF
position between HIGH and LOW.

Instruments and controls 2-41


POWER OUTLET STORAGE

Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 STORAGE TRAYS


volt, 120 W (10 A) power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one electrical WARNING
accessory.
To help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
Use this power outlet with the engine running stop, do not place sharp objects in the trays.
(do not use for extended periods of time with
the engine stopped or idling). GLOVE BOX
Avoid using when the air conditioner, head-
lights or rear window defogger are on.
NIC2177
Centre console When not in use, be sure that the cap is
closed. Do not allow water to come into con-
tact with the outlet.
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be
sure to turn off the power switch of the elec-
trical accessory being used or remove the key
from the ignition to turn the Acc power of the NIC2136
vehicle off.
Fully push the plug in sufficiently. If sufficient
WARNING
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or
the internal temperature fuse may blow. Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to
NIC2135
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden
Front armrest
stop.
To open the glove box, lift the latch and lower the lid.
WARNING Towards the rear of the glove box an elastic strap
Take care as the power outlet and plug may be can be used to hold the Owners Manual pack.
hot during or immediately after use.
CAUTION
This power outlet is not designed for use with
a cigarette lighter unit.

2-42 Instruments and controls


Sunglasses holder (where fitted)

WARNING
The sunglasses holder should not be used while
driving so that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
The glove box contains a sunglasses storage area,
which is accessible when the glove box is open.
SIC3809Z

CONSOLE BOX Cable slots

WARNING
The centre console box should not be used while
driving so that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
To open the console box lid, pull the lever j
1 or j
2
and pull up the lid.
When the lever j 1 on the right side is pulled, the
upper case is available for storing some small items. NAA1497
When the lever j 2 on the left side is pulled, the bot-
tom case is available for storing some larger ones.
The console box contains openings in the sides j
1
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. and front j2 to allow cables to be routed through
The console box lid contains designated storage the console box lid. For more information, see
areas, for example, for CDs, coins, and business Power outlet earlier in this section and AUX
cards. socket later in this section

Instruments and controls 2-43


CUP HOLDERS BOTTLE HOLDER CAUTION
Do not apply a load of more than 1 kg (2 lbs) to
the hook.
The coat hooks are fitted at the rear assist grips.
MAP POCKET (where fitted)
Map pockets are located in the doors.
SEAT POCKET (where fitted)

NIC2138 NIC2139

WARNING CAUTION

Cup holders should not be used while driving so Do not use the bottle holder for any other
that full attention may be given to vehicle opera- objects that could be thrown about in the ve-
tion. hicle and possibly injure people during sud-
den braking or an accident.
To access the rear cup holders (where fitted), lower
the centre armrest. Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid NIC1835
containers. Seat pocket (where fitted)
CAUTION
COAT HOOKS A seat pocket (where fitted) is located on the back
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the of the driver and/or passenger seat.
cup holder is being used to prevent spillage.
If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your pas-
senger.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.

SIC3505Z

2-44 Instruments and controls


ROOF RAIL (where fitted) PARCEL SHELF Do not leave the parcel shelf in position when
it is disengaged from the grooves.
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury
The child restraint top tether strap may be
damaged by contact with the parcel shelf or
items in the luggage compartment area. Re-
NIC1452 move the parcel shelf from the vehicle or store
it in its storage space. Also, secure any lose
Luggage can be carried on the roof by securing items in the luggage compartment. Your child
crossbars to the roof rail. Follow all crossbar manu- could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-
facturers instructions for installing and use of the sion if the top tether strap is damaged.
crossbars. The roof rail is designed to carry loads Removal
(luggage plus crossbars) below 75 kg (165 lb).
Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle. 1. Open the back door (see Back door lock in the
2. Pre-driving checks and adjustments sec-
tion).
2. Detach both of the ropes (left and right) j
1 from
the inside of the back door.

NIC2140
3. Detach the parcel shelf by simply pulling it rear-
wards through the back door opening.

WARNING
Never put anything on the parcel shelf, no
matter how small. Any object on it could cause
an injury in case of an accident or if the brakes
are applied suddenly.

Instruments and controls 2-45


NIC2209

CAUTION
Make sure the parcel shelf is carefully stored
when not in use in order to prevent any damage.
NOTE
The parcel shelf can be securely stored under
the luggage compartment floor boards (see
Installation later in this section).
Installation
1. Open the back door.
2. Insert the parcel shelf by pushing it forwards as
far as possible through the back door opening.
3. Attach the corresponding ropes to each side j
1
of the back door.
4. Close the back door (see Back door lock in the
2. Pre-driving checks and adjustments sec-
tion).
NPA1312

2-46 Instruments and controls


LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/BOOT The load should be distributed evenly and Vertical positions j
C
FLOOR (where fitted) should not exceed 50 kg (110 lb) on any of the
boards/panels. These positions provide further subdivisions of the
luggage space by standing either one of the boards
WARNING To avoid any damage, the panels/boards vertically in the midway slots provided in the side
should be placed in the lower position j
B for trim.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps
heavy loads and securely held with ropes or
to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do LUGGAGE HOOKS
straps to prevent any load shift.
not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo Upper position j
A
could cause personal injury.
This position provides a flat load floor when the rear
Do not put objects heavier than 50 kg (110 seat backs are folded forward. It also serves as a
lbs) on the load floor. concealed load area for objects placed below the
boards.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a NOTE
luggage area inside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to The parcel shelf can be securely stored under
be seriously injured or killed. the luggage compartment floor boards. JVI0509XZ

Move the boards as illustrated by lifting and sliding


Only two anchorage points identified by the
each board into the upper position j A.
top tether labels can be used for top tether The luggage hooks are for shopping bags, etc.
strap anchorage. Under no circumstances 1) Remove the larger floorboard as illustrated by
should the luggage hooks be used for top lifting and sliding it into the upper position j
A. WARNING
tether strap anchorage.
2) Repeat the operation with the smaller board. Do not apply a total load of more than 3 kg (7
The luggage (cargo) compartment or boot floor has lb) to the hook.
a dual surface (wet and dry), or dual position system Lower position j
B
with loose floorboards that allow different luggage This position maximises the load space in the lug-
compartment arrangements. gage compartment.
CAUTION Move both boards as illustrated by lifting and sliding
The carpet finish should face up for all dry use each board into the lower position j B.
applications.
The smooth surface should be used only when
loading wet objects.

Instruments and controls 2-47


WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS Drivers side main window switch Passengers window switch
The power window switches are located on the door
panels and will only operate when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.

WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operat-
ing the power windows.
Never leave children or adults who would nor- NIC2132 NIC2133
mally require the support of others alone in
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
The drivers switch, which is the main switch, can The passengers switch can control its correspond-
switches or controls and inadvertently
control all of the windows. ing window.
become involved in an accident.
Locking passengers windows: When the passengers window lock button on the
It is recommended to instruct all occupants in
the safe operation of power windows with par- When the lock button j
1 is pushed in, the passen- drivers side is pushed in, the passengers switch
gers windows cannot be operated. cannot be operated.
ticular emphasis given to the safety and su-
pervision of children. To cancel the passengers windows lock, push the Automatic function
The power windows only operate when the ignition lock button j
1 again.
switch is in the ON position.
To open a window, push down the power window
switch.
To close a window, pull up the power window
switch.

NIC2134

Automatic function is available for the switch that


has an mark on its surface.

2-48 Instruments and controls


FIXED GLASS ROOF (where fitted)

The automatic function enables a window to fully Depending on the environment or driving conditions,
open or close without holding the switch down or the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact
up. or load similar to something being caught in the win-
dow occurs.
To fully open the window, push the power window
switch down to the second detent and release the Reinitialisation procedure after battery
switch. To fully close the window, pull the power reconnection
window switch up to the second detent and release
the switch. The switch does not have to be held dur- Some power window functions (automatic close
ing window operation. function, auto-reverse function) will not operate as
described after the battery cable is disconnected or
To stop the window open/close operation during NIC2178
the electrical supply is interrupted. Perform the fol-
the automatic function, push down or pull up the lowing procedure to initialise the power window
switch in opposite direction. functions. j
1 Close
Auto-reverse function: 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. j
2 Open

WARNING 2. If the drivers window is closed, open it com- CAUTION


pletely by operating the drivers window switch.
There is a small distance just before the Do not place heavy objects on the glass roof
closed position which cannot be detected. 3. Pull up and hold the drivers window switch to or surrounding area.
close the drivers window. Hold the switch for
Make sure that all passengers have their
approximately 5 seconds after the window has
Do not hang from the sunshade or hang any
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing objects from it. It may cause damage or de-
the windows. been fully closed, and then release it. formation to the sunshade.
4. Check if the power window functions operate
The auto-reverse function does not work
properly.
Close the sunshade when you leave the ve-
when the window is closed manually (holding hicle for extended periods of time to prevent
the switch in the close position). If you open or close the power window continu- the inside of the vehicle from reaching high
The auto-reverse function enables a window to au- ously, it may cause the power window not to oper- temperatures.
tomatically reverse when something is caught in the ate properly. Perform the above procedure.
window as it is closing by the automatic function. If the power window functions do not operate prop-
When the control unit detects an obstacle, the win- erly after performing the above procedure, repeat
dow will be lowered immediately. the steps. See a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop, if necessary, for checking the power window
system.

Instruments and controls 2-49


INTERIOR LIGHTS

SUNSHADE OPERATION CAUTION Centre position


The sunshade operates only when the ignition switch Do not use for extended periods of time with the When the switch is in the centre position, the light
is in the ON position. engine stopped. This could discharge the bat- comes on when a door is opened
tery.
ROOM LIGHT TIMER (where fitted)
WARNING NOTE
The room light will stay on for a period of time when:
Never allow hands or fingers, or any part of your The interior lights will go off after a period of time
body within operating range of the sunshade. You unless the ignition switch is in the Acc or ON The ignition is switched off.
could be injured. position. The doors are unlocked.
Opening and closing ROOM LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Any door is opened and then closed.
Manual control: The timer is cancelled, and the interior light will turn
To close the sunshade, press and hold the CLOSE off when:
side of the switch j 1 To stop the sunshade from
closing fully, release the switch.
The doors are locked.

To open the sunshade press and hold the OPEN


The ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
side of the switch j 2 To stop the sunshade from MAP LIGHTS (where fitted)
opening fully, release the switch.
Automatic operation:
To fully open or close the sunshade automatically, SIC4573Z

press briefly on the open or close side of the switch


and then release. To stop the sunshade from open- The room light control switch has three positions:
ing or closing, press either side of the switch. ON j1 , OFF j 2 and centre j 3.
Auto-reverse function:
ON position
When the control unit detects something caught in
the sunshade, the sunshade will open automatically. When the switch is in the ON position j
1 , the light
SIC4572Z
will illuminate.
NOTE
OFF position Operate the map light switch to turn the map light
The auto-reverse function remains active
whether the sunshade is being closed manually When the switch is in the OFF position j 2 , the light on or off.
or automatically. will not illuminate, regardless of the condition. j
1 : ON position

2-50 Instruments and controls


j
2 : OFF position LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
REAR ROOM/READING LIGHT The light comes on automatically when the back
(where fitted) door is opened. When the back door is closed, the
light goes off.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (where fitted)

NIC1258Z
Room light (where fitted)

NIC1257Z

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the


cover is opened.

NIC1256Z
Reading light (where fitted)

The light can be switched on or off by pressing the


switch j3.

Instruments and controls 2-51


NOTE

2-52 Instruments and controls


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ........................................................................ 3-2 Inside door handle .............................................. 3-10


NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* key ............. 3-2 Power door lock switch ...................................... 3-10
Intelligent Key (where fitted)................................ 3-2 Child safety lock rear doors............................ 3-11
Key number ........................................................ 3-3 Back door lock ................................................... 3-11
New keys ........................................................... 3-3 Security system ....................................................... 3-12
Emergency/mechanical key (Intelligent Key Alarm system (where fitted) ................................ 3-12
models) .............................................................. 3-3 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 3-13
Integrated keyfob/remote control system.................. 3-4 Bonnet release ........................................................ 3-14
Switching from Convenience mode to Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-15
Anti-hijack mode (where fitted)............................ 3-5 Fuel filler lid opener lever .................................... 3-15
Using the remote keyless entry system................ 3-5 Fuel filler cap ...................................................... 3-15
Locking the doors............................................... 3-5 Parking brake switch ............................................... 3-16
Unlocking the doors............................................ 3-5 Driving away when towing a trailer ...................... 3-17
Keyfob operation failure ...................................... 3-5 Steering wheel......................................................... 3-18
Intelligent Key system (where fitted) ......................... 3-6 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-18
Intelligent Key operating range ............................ 3-6 Mirrors..................................................................... 3-18
Using Intelligent Key system................................ 3-6 Inside rear-view mirror ........................................ 3-18
Locking/unlocking .............................................. 3-7 Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (where
Starting the engine with the Intelligent Key .......... 3-8 fitted).................................................................. 3-19
Door locks ............................................................... 3-8 Outside rear-view mirrors.................................... 3-19
Super Lock system (RHD models) ...................... 3-8 Vanity mirror ....................................................... 3-20
Locking/unlocking with the key (vehicle dead
battery)............................................................... 3-9
KEYS

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-


(NATS)* KEY ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, imme-
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys spe- diately wipe until it is completely dry.
cific to your vehicle. Only NISSAN Anti-Theft Sys-
tem (NATS)* keys can be used with your vehicle Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come
(see Security system later in this section). into contact with water or salt water this
could affect the system function.
INTELLIGENT KEY (where fitted)
Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent other object.
NPA1361 Keys, which are registered to your vehicles Intelli-
Integrated keyfob and key Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
gent Key system components and NISSAN Anti-
tended period in a place where tempera-
1. NATS Key Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4
tures exceed 60C (140F).
Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with
2. Key number plate one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a Do not change or modify the Intelligent
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to use Key.
with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your
Do not use a magnetic key holder.
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo- Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all ment that produces a magnetic field such
Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer as a TV, audio equipment and personal
or qualified workshop. computers.
*: Immobilizer If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that In-
CAUTION
SPA2502Z telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent
Intelligent Key with emergency/mechanical key Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Key from unauthorised use to unlock the ve-
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent hicle. For information regarding the erasing
1. Intelligent Key
Key inside. procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer
2. Emergency/Mechanical key (inside the Intel- or qualified workshop.
ligent Key), see Emergency/mechanical key Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-
(Intelligent Key models) later in this section
sion device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid
3. Key number plate damaging it, please note the following.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


KEY NUMBER EMERGENCY/MECHANICAL KEY Intelligent Key:
A key number plate j
3 is supplied with your key (Intelligent Key models) To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
Record the key number on the Security Informa-
tion page at the end of this manual and keep it in a To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
safe place, but not in the vehicle. The key can only the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
be duplicated using an original key or the original the lock position.
key number. The key number is required when you Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
have lost all of the keys and do not have the original (See Door locks later in this section.)
key to duplicate from. If the key is lost, or you need
extra keys, provide an original key or the key number For further details on accessing and using the emer-
to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. gency key, see Ignition switch (where fitted) in the
NPA1302 5. Starting and driving section.
NISSAN does not record key numbers, so it is very
important that you keep a record of your key num- NOTE
ber. For the driver side door, it is normal for the key
NEW KEYS not to go all the way into the key cylinder.
As many as four NATS keys can be registered to
one vehicle at any one time. New keys must be reg-
istered to the NATS components of your vehicle by
a NISSAN dealer.
When registering a new key at a NISSAN dealer,
you are requested to bring all of your NATS keys
with you. This is necessary because the registration SPA2033Z
process will erase and reprogram the memory of
your vehicles NATS components.
The emergency key can be used to unlock the driv-
NOTE ers door and start the engine in emergency situa-
tions (e.g. Intelligent Key dead battery).
A key number is only required if you have lost all
of your keys and do not have one to duplicate Integrated keyfob and key:
from. If you still have a key, this key can be dupli-
cated by a NISSAN dealer.
To use the mechanical key, push the release but-
ton located on top of the key. The key will unfold
from its housing until it locks in place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


INTEGRATED KEYFOB/REMOTE
CONTROL SYSTEM

vehicle (the effective distance depends upon the CAUTION


conditions around the vehicle and the state of the
keyfob battery). When locking the doors using the integrated
keyfob, be sure not to leave the key in the
As many as 5 remote controllers can be used with
vehicle.
one vehicle. For information about the purchase and
use of additional remote controllers, contact a Always remove the ignition key or Intelligent
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Key, close all windows before operating the
The integrated keyfob will not function under the fol- keyfob door lock system.
lowing conditions:
Ensure that the drivers door is securely
NPA1304 When the distance between the integrated key- closed before operating the integrated keyfob
Key with Integrated keyfob fob and vehicle is more than approximately 5 m door lock system for correct operation of the
(15 ft). system.
When the integrated keyfob battery is Do not allow the integrated keyfob, which
discharged. contains electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This could
When the key is in the ignition switch.
affect the system function.
All doors can be locked or unlocked from the out-
side by pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK Do not drop the integrated keyfob.
button on the integrated keyfob. Do not strike the integrated keyfob sharply
For Super Lock system models only: against another object.
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
NPA1081 doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so will
Do not place the integrated keyfob for an ex-
tended period in an area where temperatures
Intelligent Key trap the occupants, since the Super Lock system exceed 60C (140F).
j
A Key release button prevents the doors from being opened from the
inside. If a integrated keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
j
B Status indicator LED ommends erasing the ID code of that integrated
Lock button WARNING keyfob from the vehicle. This may prevent the unau-
thorised use of the integrated keyfob to unlock the
Unlock button Only operate the integrated keyfob lock button in vehicle. For information regarding the erasing pro-
full and clear view of the vehicle to prevent any- cedure, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
The remote keyless entry system can operate all body being trapped inside the vehicle.
door locks (including the back door) using the inte- shop.
grated keyfob. The integrated keyfob can operate at
a distance of approximately 5 m (15 ft) from the

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


For information regarding the replacement of a bat- hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being (Select the [Unlocking] menu key).
tery, see Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key battery trapped inside the vehicle through the Super Also see Vehicle information display in the 2. In-
replacement in the 8. Maintenance and Lock system activation. struments and controls section.
do-it-yourself section.
For further details on the Super Lock system see ANTI-HIJACK MODE (where fitted)
SWITCHING FROM CONVENIENCE Door locks later in this section.
Unlock the drivers door only, pressing the
MODE TO ANTI-HIJACK MODE LOCKING THE DOORS button once.
(where fitted) Press the button twice to open all doors.
CAUTION
Selective unlock or Anti-hijack mode (where fit- Setting the Anti-hijack mode is done using the [Set-
ted) allows the remote unlocking of only the drivers Before operating the keyfob remote control:
tings] menu in the vehicle information display (Se-
door to prevent an attacker from entering the vehicle Remove the ignition key or Intelligent Key lect the [Unlocking] menu key). Set [Selective Un-
via an unlocked passenger door. from the vehicle and close all windows. lock] to off.
As default, the unlock mode will be set to Conve- For more information see Vehicle information
nience mode (all doors will unlock). Follow the in- Check that the drivers door is securely
display in the 2. Instruments and controls sec-
closed.
structions in Vehicle information display later in tion.
this section. Push the LOCK button on the integrated key-
Auto-relock (where fitted):
fob.
USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS An auto-relock function will a short period after a full
ENTRY SYSTEM All the doors lock.
or partial unlock, if no further user action is taken.
The direction indicators flash once. The auto-relock will be cancelled if any door is
WARNING opened or the key is inserted into the ignition.
If the LOCK button is pushed with all the doors
Super Lock system equipped models: locked, the direction indicators will flash once to KEYFOB OPERATION FAILURE
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead remind you that the doors are already locked.
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super The keyfob may not work properly if:
UNLOCKING THE DOORS
Lock system activation is always conducted The keyfob battery is low.
safely. When you first receive the vehicle, the door unlock See Integrated keyfob/Intelligent Key battery
mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of replacement in the 8. Maintenance and
When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
the UNLOCK button. do-it-yourself section for keyfob battery replace-
doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock ment instructions and the required battery type.
Convenience mode
system prevents the doors from being opened
from the inside of the vehicle. Unlock all doors, pressing the button once.
Setting the convenience mode is done using the
Only operate the integrated keyfob LOCK [Settings] menu in the vehicle information display
button when there is a clear view of the ve-

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5


INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(where fitted)

The locking/unlocking system has been used The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from
continuously. each request button j 1.
An anti lock-abuse system prevents the lock mo- If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
tors from overheating and disables the keyfob door handle or rear bumper, the request switches
locking operation for a short period of time if the may not function.
system is used continuously. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who
The door handle is being pulled while the
does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re-
keyfob is being operated.
quest button to lock/unlock the doors including the
The vehicles battery is dead.
NPA1362
back door.
NOTE USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
See [NO KEY Detected] warning, [Key battery The Intelligent Key system is a convenient keyless
low] indicator, [Key ID Incorrect] warning or In- entry system that allows you to operate your vehicle
telligent Key system warning in Vehicle informa- without using an actual key.
tion display in the 2. Instruments and controls
section for more information. WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medi-
cal equipment. Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before
NPA1327
use.
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING The request button will not function under the fol-
RANGE lowing conditions:
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when
the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating
When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

range from the request (lock/unlock) button j 1. When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or tional range
strong radio waves are present near the operating When any door is open or not closed securely
location, the Intelligent Key systems operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
may not function properly.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


LOCKING/UNLOCKING Locking the doors
1. Make sure you have the Intelligent Key when exit-
ing the vehicle.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press any of the request buttons (front doors or
back door).
All doors and the back door will be locked.
SPA2407Z The direction indicators flash once.
NPA1306 Super Lock system equipped models: The
Do not push the door handle request button with Super Lock system will be activated
the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. 4. Pull the door handles to confirm that the doors
The close distance to the door handle will cause have been securely locked.
the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty rec-
ognising that the Intelligent Key is outside the CAUTION
vehicle. Do not leave the duplicate Intelligent Key inside
After locking the doors using the door handle the vehicle as the locking procedure logic will
not work.
request switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the door NOTE
handles.
If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and the
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in- NPA1307
door/back door request button is pressed, a
side the vehicle, make sure you carry the key buzzer will sound to indicate that the Intelligent
with you and then lock the doors. The Intelligent Key system allows you to lock and Key is still inside the vehicle.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing the unlock the drivers door, passenger doors, or back
Unlocking the doors
door handle request button. The door will be door without pressing the or button on the
unlocked but will not open. Release the door Intelligent Key or using the emergency key (drivers For details about the anti-hijack mode (where fitted)
handle once and pull it again to open the door. door key cylinder). When the Intelligent Key is near or the convenience mode settings , see Switching
the vehicle, the door locks can be locked or un- from Convenience mode to Anti-hijack mode (where
locked by pressing the drivers door, front passen- fitted) earlier in this section or [Unlocking] in the
gers door or back door request button. And the 2. Instruments and controls section.
direction indicators will flash as a confirmation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7


DOOR LOCKS

Convenience mode: The Intelligent Key contains a miniature radio SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (RHD models)
Push the door/back door request button. transmitter that may be affected when placed
near metal objects. WARNING
All doors and the back door will be unlocked.
Keep the Intelligent Key away from mobile Super Lock system equipped models:
The direction indicators flash twice. phones, laptop computers and other metal
objects or electronics. Failure to follow the precautions below may lead
The message [All door unlock] appears in the
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super
vehicle information display. STARTING THE ENGINE WITH THE Lock system activation is always conducted
Anti-hijack mode (where fitted): INTELLIGENT KEY safely.
1. Push the door/back door request button. See Push-button ignition switch (where fitted) in When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the
The corresponding door unlocks. the 5. Starting and driving section. doors with the integrated keyfob. Doing so
will trap the occupants, since the Super Lock
The direction indicators flash twice quickly. CAUTION
system prevents the doors from being opened
2. Push the request button again within 5 seconds. Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with from the inside of the vehicle.
you when starting and driving the vehicle.
All the doors and the back door will be unlocked. Only operate the integrated keyfob LOCK
If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the button when there is a clear view of the ve-
The direction indicators flash twice. passenger compartment, the vehicle may not hicle. This is to prevent anybody from being
start. See Intelligent Key operating range in trapped inside the vehicle through the Super
NOTE
the 3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments Lock system activation.
External interference may impair the Intelli- section
Pressing the LOCK button ( ) on the integrated
gent Keys operation. In this case, use the
emergency key located in the Intelligent Key keyfob or locking the doors using one of the request
integrated keyfob. See Door locks later in buttons (Intelligent Key models) will activate the Su-
this section for further details. per Lock system.
When the Super Lock system is active, none of the
If the vehicle is unlocked and no doors are
doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. This
opened for 2 minutes the doors will automati-
cally be locked. provides additional security in case of theft or break-
in.
CAUTION
The Super Lock system will be released when all
Make sure the Intelligent Key battery is in good the doors are unlocked using the integrated keyfob
condition. Note that battery life may vary de- or a request button (Intelligent Key models).
pending on condition, amount of use, ambi-
ent temperature, etc.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Emergency situations Locking without activating the Super you when leaving. If an emergency occurs it
Lock system may be more difficult to help them otherwise.
If the Super Lock system is activated while you are
inside the vehicle, for example by a traffic accident The drivers door can be locked/unlocked from out-
or other unexpected circumstances, follow the in- WARNING side using the key/emergency key if the vehicles
structions below. battery is dead.
Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when leav-
To release the Super Lock system: ing the vehicle. To lock the door, insert the key into the drivers door
key cylinder and turn it towards the front of the ve-
Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it Locking the doors using the door key cylinder or
hicle j
1.
to the ON position. power door lock switch will not activate the Super
Lock system. See Locking/unlocking with the key To unlock the door, turn the key towards the rear of
All doors can now be unlocked and opened from
(vehicle dead battery) later in this section for fur- the vehicle j
2.
inside the vehicle.
ther information.
See Emergency/mechanical key (Intelligent Key
Remove the key from the ignition switch and un-
lock the doors using the integrated keyfob UN- LOCKING/UNLOCKING WITH THE models) in the 5. Pre-driving checks and
KEY (vehicle dead battery) adjustments section for instructions on accessing
LOCK button ( ).
the Intelligent Key system Emergency key.
All doors can now be opened from inside the
CAUTION
vehicle.
To unlock and open the drivers door from The alarm system will be triggered when the door
inside the vehicle while the Super Lock system is opened using the key (NISSAN alarm equipped
is active: models). To stop the alarm, turn the ignition key
to the ON position or press the unlock button
1. Open or break the drivers door window.
( ) on the integrated keyfob.
2. Insert the key into the outside door key cylinder
and turn it towards the rear of the vehicle.
Initialising the system after vehicle
SPA2602Z
battery loading or replacement
3. The drivers door will unlock and can now be
opened from inside the vehicle. After recharging or replacing the battery, you should
release (initialise) the system by:
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key Inserting the key into the ignition switch and then
turning it to the ON position.
inside the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle Unlocking the vehicle using the integrated key-
fob.
and always be sure you have your keys with

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9


INSIDE DOOR HANDLE POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH trimming, can be used to lock j 1 or unlock j 2 all
doors simultaneously from inside the vehicle.
The door lock indicator light ( ) in the centre
console comes on when the doors are locked.
NOTE
Models without the Super Lock system: If a door
is manually opened from inside after having
pressed the integrated keyfob LOCK button
( ). As a result, the door will unlock and the
power door lock indicator light ( ) goes out.
SPA2531Z NPA1329
Power door lock light Locking the doors when leaving the
To unlock and open the door, pull the inside door
vehicle (where fitted)
handle as illustrated. It is possible to lock all doors using the power door
lock switch when leaving the vehicle:
Models with Super Lock system
(where fitted) 1. Open the drivers door, remove the key from the
ignition or the Intelligent Key (where fitted) from
The door cannot be opened when the Super Lock the passenger compartment.
system is activated.
2. Press the side of the power door lock switch
j1.

NPA1308
All doors except the drivers door lock
3. Close the drivers door.
j
1 Press to lock The drivers door locks.
j
2 Press to unlock The indicator light in the centre console
comes on.
WARNING
Super Lock system models: The Super Lock
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key system is not activated.
inside the vehicle.
The power door lock switch, located on the door

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Intelligent Key models: If the Intelligent Key has When the switch is in the LOCK position, the rear The back door can be manually opened from the
been left inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock door can only be opened from the outside. outside, and it is not locked by the power door lock
and an audible warning will sound. system, by pushing the button j 1 located above the
BACK DOOR LOCK rear number plate.
Super Lock equipped models (RHD
models) To open the back door, unlock it first with one of the
following operations, then push the button j 1.
If the doors are locked using the integrated keyfob
lock button ( ) or a request button (Intelligent Key Push the request button j 2 of the back door
models), the Super Lock system will be activated. (where fitted). See Intelligent Key system
The indicator light in the centre console comes (where fitted) earlier in this section.
on to indicate that all doors are locked, but it will not
be possible to use the button of the power door
Push the button on the Intelligent Key (where
fitted). See Intelligent Key system (where fitted)
lock switch to unlock the doors. earlier in this section.
Locking the doors with the power door lock switch NPA1311
will not activate the Super Lock system. Push the button on the integrated keyfob
(where fitted). See Integrated keyfob/remote
CHILD SAFETY LOCK REAR WARNING control system earlier in this section.
DOORS
Always check that the back door has been Unlock all the doors using the key.
properly closed to prevent it from opening
while driving.
Push the side of the power door lock switch.
To close the back door, pull it down until it securely
Do not drive with the back door opened. This locks and if necessary, lock it with the power door
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be lock system.
drawn into the vehicle.
Closely supervise children when they are
around the vehicle to prevent them from play-
ing and being locked in the luggage compart-
NPA859Z ment where they could be seriously injured.
Keep the vehicle locked, with the back door
closed, when not in use, and prevent chil-
The child safety lock helps prevent doors from be- drens access to the vehicles keys.
ing opened accidentally, especially when small chil-
dren are in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11


SECURITY SYSTEM

ALARM SYSTEM (where fitted) The ignition circuit is turned on without the own-
ers key being used.
The alarm system provides visual and audible alarm
signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed. The alarm system will stop when:

How to arm the alarm system The vehicle is unlocked using the keyfob or intel-
ligent key unlock button.
1. Close all doors, windows, back door and bon-
net. The ignition switch or ignition knob is turned to
the ON position with a registered NATS key.
2. Lock the vehicle using the keyfob (lock button),
If the system does not operate as described
for additional information, see Integrated key-
NPA990 above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer or
fob/remote control system in the 3. Pre-driving
qualified workshop.
checks and adjustments section.
Vehicle dead battery Back door lock NOTE Ultrasonic sensors (where fitted)
release lever (where fitted) The ultrasonic sensors (volumetric sensing) detect
If the vehicle is not fully locked, a door/bonnet/
The vehicles back door can be unlocked from the movements in the passengers compartment. When
back door is open, or the ignition switch is in the
inside when the battery is dead. Tilt the seatback the alarm system is set to the armed position, it will
ON position (after arming the system), the buzzer
down. Remove the cover from the lock and slide the automatically switch on the ultrasonic sensors.
will sound. After correctly closing, the buzzer will
release lever j1 as illustrated. See Rear seats in stop. It is possible to exclude the ultrasonic sensors (e.g.
the 1. Safety Seats, Seat belts and Supplemen- when leaving pets inside the car).
tal Restraint System section for more information Alarm system operation
regarding the seat operation. The system will give the following alarm:
The siren sounds intermittently and all direction
indicators will flash.
The alarm automatically turns off after 28 sec-
onds.
The alarm is activated when:
The volumetric sensing system (ultrasonic sen-
sors) is triggered. NIC2219

Any door/the back door is opened.


The bonnet is opened.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


To exclude the ultrasonic sensors: 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
1. Press the ultrasonic sensor deactivation button
j1. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
2. Close the door(s)/bonnet/back door and press 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
the lock button on the keyfob to lock all doors/ (which may have caused the interference) sepa-
back door. rated from the registered NATS key or NATS
Intelligent Key (where fitted).
The ultrasonic sensors are now excluded from the
alarm system. All other functions of the system re- If this procedure allows the engine to start,
main activated until the alarm system is disarmed NISSAN recommends placing the registered SIC2045Z
again. NATS key or NATS Intelligent Key (where fitted) Meters and gauges (Type A)
on a separate key-ring to avoid interference from
NOTE other devices.
One or any further number of presses of the ul-
trasonic sensor deactivation button j 1 excludes
the ultrasonic sensors for the next time the alarm
system is armed and only that instance. Pressing
the button twice does not reactivate the system.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the reg- NIC1402Z
istered NATS key. Drivers side (Type B)
* Immobilizer NATS security warning/indicator light
If the engine fails to start using the registered NATS (where fitted)
key, it may be due to interference from another
One of the following functions (depending on the
NATS key, an automated toll road device or an auto-
vehicle specifications) indicates that the vehicle is
mated payment device on the key ring. Restart the
equipped with NATS:
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for The NATS security warning light (Type A) is lo-
cated in the meter panel and blinks whenever
approximately 5 seconds.
the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or Acc
position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13


BONNET RELEASE

The NATS security indicator light (Type j B ) is 2. Pull the lever j


2 , at the front of the bonnet, with
located on the Drivers side of the dashboard your fingertips and raise the bonnet.
and blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the
3. Insert the support rod j3 into the slot on the
LOCK, OFF or Acc position.
frame behind the headlight unit.
If the NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) is mal-
4. When closing the bonnet, replace the support
functioning, this light will remain on while the ignition
rod in its original position, then slowly close the
switch is in the ON position.
bonnet and make sure it locks into place.
If the light remains on and/or the engine will not
start, see your NISSAN dealer for NATS service WARNING
as soon as possible. Please bring all NATS keys
or NATS Intelligent Keys when visiting your Always check whether the bonnet is closed and
NISSAN dealer for service. locked securely to prevent it from opening while
driving. The vehicle should only be operated with
Additional information for RHD models the bonnet securely closed.
If the NATS is malfunctioning, this light will turn on
after flashing six times while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
However, if the NATS security warning light turns
off after the light has remained on for 15 minutes,
there is a 10 second time slot to start the engine
after the ignition is turned off. See your NISSAN
dealer for NATS service as soon as possible.
NPA1300

j
A LHD models
j
B RHD models
1. Pull the bonnet lock release lever j1 , located
below the instrument panel on the drivers side;
the bonnet will spring up slightly.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


FUEL FILLER LID

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER LEVER FUEL FILLER CAP the fuel system and emission control system.
An incorrect cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury.
CAUTION
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away
with water to avoid paint damage.

NPA1271 NPA832Z

j
A LHD models The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the
cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
j
B RHD models
Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder as illustrated
To open the fuel filler lid, pull up the opener lever,
while refuelling.
located below the instrument panel on the drivers
side. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.
WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explo-
sive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke or allow open flames
or sparks near the vehicle when refuelling.
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap half
a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop,
in order to prevent fuel from spraying out and
causing possible personal injury.
Use only a NISSAN fuel filler cap or exact
equivalent as a replacement. It has a built-in
safety valve needed for proper operation of

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15


PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Vehicle with push-button ignition switch: Vehicle with push-button ignition switch:
The parking brake will automatically release While the engine is running, press the brake
when you drive away using the accelerator, and pedal and push the parking brake switch j A,
will automatically apply when you switch the en- while switching the ignition switch OFF.
gine off.
The parking brake can also be released when the
XTRONIC transmission vehicles: ignition switch is in the OFF position, provided the
key is in the ignition switch; or for vehicles with
The parking brake does not apply automatically. If
push-button ignition switch before a door is opened.
applied manually, the parking brake will automati-
Press the brake pedal and push the parking brake
cally release when you press the accelerator with
NPA1270 switch j A.
the shift lever in Drive (D) or Reverse (R), provided:

The electric parking brake can be applied or re- The driver is wearing a seat belt, or WARNING
leased by operating the parking brake switch j
A. The driver accelerates away within 5 seconds of Be sure the electric parking brake is released
To apply: Pull the switch j
A up j
1 the indicator shifting from Park (P) or Neutral (N) to Drive (D) before driving. Failure to do so could cause
light will illuminate. or Reverse (R). brake failure and lead to an accident.
To release: With the ignition switch in the ON posi- If you have tried to start driving the vehicle while not
wearing a seat belt, you will need to put on your seat
Do not release the parking brake from out-
tion, depress the brake pedal and push the switch side the vehicle.
jA down j 2 . The indicator light will turn off. belt and place the shift lever in Drive (D) or Reverse
(R) again before the parking brake will release auto- Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Before driving, check that the brake warning light matically. They could release the parking brake and
goes out. For additional information, see Warn- cause an accident.
ing/indicator lights and audible reminders in the If you have a vehicle with XTRONIC Transmission,
2. Instruments and controls section. and you require automatic parking brake applica- Before leaving the vehicle, confirm that the
tion, please contact a NISSAN dealer. vehicle is held by the parking brake or trans-
The electric parking brake also has an auto apply mission.
and auto release function. To keep the electric parking brake released after
turning off the ignition: NOTE
Manual transmission vehicles:
Vehicle with key ignition switch: Do not start driving while the parking brake is
Vehicle with key ignition switch:
While the ignition switch is in the ON position,
applied this may cause the paring brake to
The parking brake will automatically release overheat or reduce its effectiveness, which
press the brake pedal and push the parking brake could result in an accident.
when you drive away using the accelerator, and switch jA , while turning the ignition switch OFF.
will automatically apply when the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven Pull up the electric parking brake switch twice dency to roll back downhill when driving away from
without releasing the parking brake. See Au- so that the maximum electric parking brake a standstill. You can prevent this by pulling up the
dible reminders in the 2. Instruments and force is applied to the vehicle. parking brake switch as you press the accelerator
controls section. (in the same way as with a conventional handbrake).
When pulling the electric parking brake switch
While the electric parking brake is applied or up with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC
released, an operating sound is heard from position, the parking brake switch indicator
the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal light will continue to illuminate for a short pe-
and does not indicate a malfunction. riod of time.
When the electric parking brake is frequently CAUTION
applied and released in a short period of time,
To park the vehicle in cold climates place the
the parking brake may not operate in order to
shift lever in 1st (1) or Reverse (R) (or in Park (P)
prevent the parking brake system from over-
for automatic (AT) vehicles), and place suitable
heating. If this occurs, operate the electric
chocks at both the front and back of a wheel with
parking brake switch again after waiting ap-
the electric parking brake released. If the electric
proximately 1 minute.
parking brake is applied in cold climates, the
The electric parking brake can only be re- brake may become frozen and cannot be re-
leased with the ignition switch in the ON posi- leased.
tion.
DRIVING AWAY WHEN TOWING A
If the electric parking brake must be applied TRAILER
while driving in an emergency, pull up and
hold the parking brake switch. When you re- Please note the following points to prevent the ve-
lease the parking brake switch, the parking hicle from rolling back unintentionally on a gradient.
brake will be released. Pull and hold the parking brake switch and press
While pulling up the electric parking brake the accelerator. The parking brake will remain
switch while driving, the parking brake is ap- engaged and prevent any tendency to roll back
plied and a chime sounds. The parking brake down the slope.
indicator light in the meter and in the parking
brake switch illuminate. This does not indi-
You can release the parking brake switch as
soon as the engine is delivering enough power
cate a malfunction. The electric parking brake to the wheels.
indicator lights in the meter and in the parking
brake switch turn off when the parking brake Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer
is released. and the steepness of the slope, there may be a ten-

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17


STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS MIRRORS

INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR

NPA1272 NPA839Z

NPA862Z

WARNING CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning it to j1 Night position
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and cause its original position. j2 Day position
an accident. 1. To block out glare from the front, move the main jA Front of the vehicle
sun visor downwards.
Release the lock lever as illustrated and adjust the The night position j1 will reduce glare from the
steering wheel to the desired position (up or down, 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
forwards or backwards). Firmly push the lock lever sun visor from the centre mount and move it to
back into position to lock the steering wheel in place. the side. WARNING
Only use the night position j 1 when necessary,
as it reduces rear-view clarity.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
MIRROR (where fitted)
WARNING
Check the position of all mirrors before driv-
ing. Altering their position while driving could
distract your attention from the driving opera-
tion.
Objects viewed in the outside mirrors are
closer than they appear.
NPA1276

Never touch the outside rear-view mirrors


while they are in motion. Doing so may pinch
NPA1273
your fingers or damage the mirror.
Adjusting Remote control
j
A LHD models
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically Never drive the vehicle with the outside rear-
adjusts the reflection according to the intensity of view mirrors folded. This reduces rear view j
B RHD models
the following vehicles headlights on the sensor jC. visibility and may lead to an accident.
Slide the control to the left j
1 or to the right j
2 to
The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror will oper- select the left or right outside rear-view mirror, then
ate when the ignition switch is in the Acc or ON adjust the mirror to the desired position by pushing
position. The light j
A shows the system is activated. the control as illustrated j3.

The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror can be de-


activated by pressing the power button jB . The light
jA will turn off to show system deactivation.
CAUTION
Do not cover the sensor, hang any object on the
mirror or spray glass cleaner directly on the mir-
ror. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensor, resulting in improper operation.
NPA1278

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19


Folding Manual control 3. Fold out the mirrors electronically using the out-
side rear-view mirror folding button.
Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing it to-
wards the rear of the vehicle. 4. Adjust the mirror to the correct driving angle us-
ing the remote control, see -19.
VANITY MIRROR

NPA1277

j
A LHD models NPA842Z

j
B RHD models
Left hand drive

Folding Remote control (where fitted)


The outside rear-view mirrors automatically fold
when the outside rear-view mirror folding button j
1
is pressed. To unfold, push the button again.
NOTE
If the mirror becomes displaced from its adjusted
position, use the following procedure to return it
to the correct geared position:
NPA910Z
1. Fold the mirrors electronically using the outside Right hand drive
rear-view mirror folding button.
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
2. Wait until the mirror emits a strong noise, this visor and lift up the cover.
confirms that the mirror has correctly engaged.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system

Safety precautions ................................................... 4-2 Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-23


Rear-view monitor (where fitted)............................... 4-2 Antenna.............................................................. 4-23
How to read the displayed lines .......................... 4-3 FM AM radio with CD player (where fitted) .............. 4-24
Rear-view monitor setting.................................... 4-3 Audio main operation .......................................... 4-25
Operating tips..................................................... 4-3 Radio operation .................................................. 4-25
Around View Monitor (where fitted) .......................... 4-4 SETUP button .................................................... 4-26
Operation ........................................................... 4-7 Compact Disc (CD) operation ............................ 4-28
Guide lines ......................................................... 4-7 AUX socket ........................................................ 4-30
Difference between predictive and actual USB Memory operation (where fitted) ................. 4-30
distances............................................................ 4-9 iPod player operation (where fitted).................. 4-31
Moving object detection (MOD) .......................... 4-12 Bluetooth operation.......................................... 4-32
How to adjust the screen view ............................ 4-13 NissanConnect (where fitted)................................... 4-38
Around View Monitor settings ............................. 4-13 Steering wheel switch for audio control (where
Operating tips..................................................... 4-13 fitted)....................................................................... 4-38
Vents....................................................................... 4-14 Main operation.................................................... 4-38
Side and centre vents ......................................... 4-14 Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with
Heater and air conditioner operation ........................ 4-15 CD player (where fitted)........................................... 4-39
Manual air conditioner......................................... 4-16 Bluetooth mobile phone feature........................ 4-39
Automatic dual zone air conditioner (where Hands-free telephone control .............................. 4-42
fitted).................................................................. 4-20 Steering wheel switches (where fitted)................ 4-44
Audio system ........................................................... 4-23 Car phone or CB radio ............................................ 4-45
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REAR-VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)

because of the use of wide-angle lens. Ob-


WARNING jects in the rear-view monitor will appear visu-
Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner ally reversed compared to those viewed in the
controls or audio controls while driving so that inside and outside mirrors.
full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
Make sure that the back door is securely
closed when reversing.
If you noticed any foreign objects entering the
The area below the bumper and corner areas
system hardware, spilled liquid on the sys- of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rear-
tem, or noticed smoke or fumes coming out view monitor because of its monitoring range
from the system, or any other unusual opera- NAA1434 limitation.
tion is observed, stop using the system imme-
diately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealer
j
1 Display
Do not put anything on the rear-view camera.
or qualified workshop. Ignoring such condi- The rear-view camera is installed above the
tions may lead to an accident, fire or electric j
2 Camera number plate.
shock. When washing the vehicle with high pressure
When the shift lever is moved into the R (Reverse)
Do not disassemble or modify this system. If position, the monitor (NissanConnect display) water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
era. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
you do, it may lead to an accident, fire, or shows the view from the rear of the vehicle.
electric shock. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in unit causing possibly water condensation on
detecting large stationary objects. It is intended to the lens, a malfunction, a fire or an electric
CAUTION shock.
help avoid damaging the vehicle when reversing.
Do not use the system when the engine is not However, the system will not detect small objects
running for extended periods of time to prevent below the bumper and may not detect objects close
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in-
strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or
battery discharge. to the bumper or on the ground. cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
WARNING
CAUTION
The rear-view camera is a convenience but it
There is a transparent cover over the camera
is not a substitute for proper reversing. Al-
ways turn your head and visually check that lens. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt
the manoeuvre is safe to do so before revers- or snow from it.
ing. Always reverse slowly.
The distance from the objects viewed in the
rear-view monitor differs from actual distance

4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED than they appear. Use the inside mirror or until the screen changes. Objects on the screen
LINES glance over your shoulder to properly judge may be distorted until they are completely dis-
distances to other objects. played.
The lines which are displayed on the monitor, indi- When the temperature is extremely high or low,
cate the vehicles clearance and distance between the screen may not clearly display objects. This
the obstacle and the bumper j A. is not a malfunction.
Displayed lines indicate the distances between the
obstacle and the bumper as follows: When strong light directly enters the camera
lens, objects may not be displayed clearly. This
j
1 0.5 m (1.5 ft) red is not a malfunction.
j
2 1 m (3 ft) yellow Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light from
SAA0889Z j
3 2 m (7 ft) green
the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
j
4 3 m (10 ft) green
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
WARNING NOTE This is not a malfunction.
Use the displayed lines as a reference. The The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the The colours of objects on the rear-view monitor
lines are highly affected by the number of oc- actual clearance. may differ somewhat from those of the actual
cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con- object.
dition and road grade. Always check with your The lines are indicated as reference distances
eyes directly around the vehicle while revers- to the obstacle. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
ing. dark place or at night.
REAR-VIEW MONITOR SETTING
The distance guide line and the vehicle width For details, see the separately provided NissanCon-
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the transparent
line should be used as a reference only when camera cover, the rear-view monitor may not
nect Owners Manual. clearly display objects. Clean the transparent
the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for refer- OPERATING TIPS camera cover.
ence only and may be different than the ac-
When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
tual distance between the vehicle and dis- NissanConnect display automatically changes to the transparent camera cover. This will cause
played objects. the rear-view monitor mode. discoloration. To clean the transparent camera
cover, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted
When reversing the vehicle up a hill, objects
When the shift lever is returned to a position mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry
viewed in the monitor are further than they other than R (Reverse), it may take some time
appear. When reversing the vehicle down a cloth.
hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3
AROUND VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)

Do not damage the transparent camera cover as


the NissanConnect display may be adversely af-
fected.
Do not use body wax on the transparent camera
cover. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

NAA1437 NAA1498
Camera button Right Hand Drive

j
1 Message area
j
2 [MOD] indicator*
j
3 Birds-eye view or side view
j
4 Parking sensors
j
5 Corner indication
j
6 [PA] switch**
Birds-eye view or front-side view

NAA1478
j
7 Front or rear view indicator
Left Hand Drive ** For more information, see Intelligent Parking As-
sist (IPA) (where fitted) in the 5. Starting and
driving section.
Designs and items displayed on the screen may
vary depending on the country and model.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the
<CAMERA> button or move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position to operate the Around View Moni-
tor. The monitor displays various views around the
vehicle.

4-4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
NOTE
WARNING
At first operation, the corner lines are blinking
yellow for about 3 seconds. This is not a malfunc- The Around View Monitor is intended for day
tion but a reminder to be cautious. time use. Do not use the system in bad light
conditions.
Available views:
The Around View Monitor is a convenience
Birds-eye View feature. It is not a substitute for proper ve-
The surrounding view of the vehicle. hicle operation because it has areas where
objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of
Front-side View the vehicle in particular, are blind spots where
The view around and ahead of the front passen- objects do not appear in the birds-eye, front
gers side wheel. or rear views. Always look out the windows
and check to be sure that it is safe to move.
Front view The driver is always responsible for safety dur-
The view to the front of the vehicle. ing parking and other manoeuvres.

Rear view Do not use the Around View Monitor with the
outside mirror in the stored position, and
The view to the rear of the vehicle. make sure that the back door is securely
Full screen rear view closed when operating the vehicle using the
Around View Monitor.
The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a
little wider than the standard rear view) The distance between objects viewed on the
Around View Monitor differs from the actual
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in NAA1506
distance.
situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
There are some areas where the system will not The cameras are installed on the front grille,
the outside mirrors and above the rear num-
show objects. When in the front or the rear view dis-
ber plate. Do not put anything on the cam-
play, an object below the bumper or on the ground
eras.
may not be viewed j 1 . When in the bird-eye view,
a tall object near the seam j 3 of the camera view- When washing the vehicle with high-pressure
ing areas will not appear in the monitor j
2. water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
eras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on the lens,
a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-5
Do not strike the cameras. They are precision
instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion or cause damage resulting in a fire or an
electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or
snow from the front of the camera.

NAA1450
Example for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models, for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the screen layout will be opposite.

4-6 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
OPERATION When the shift lever is shifted out of the R (Re- approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH), the monitor
verse) position jA , the monitor changes from changes from Around View Monitor screen to
The Around View Monitor display consists of the Around View Monitor screen to the audio or navi- the audio or navigation screen.
front, left, right and rear screens. You can see a gation screen.
combination of different views on the screens as GUIDE LINES
illustrated. In R (Reverse) gear, the rear view and birds-eye
view j 2 are shown. The passengers side view
j
A : Audio or navigation screen before the Around on the monitor changes to the front side view j4
WARNING
View Monitor is operated. when the <CAMERA> button is pushed. The distance guide line and the vehicle width
j
1 : Front view and birds-eye view Push the <CAMERA> button again change to
line should be used as a reference only when
the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The
j
2 : Rear view and birds-eye view Rear View j 5 . When the shift lever is shifted out distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
of the R (Reverse), the screen changes to before
j
3 : Front view and front side view
reversing screen.
ence only and may be different than the ac-
tual distance between the vehicle and dis-
j
4 : Rear view and front side view
Push the <CAMERA> button from j 5 to change played objects.
j
5 : Rear view back to rear view and birds-eye view j2. Use the displayed lines and the bird-eye view
: Shift lever into R (Reverse) Starting with the CAMERA button as a reference. The lines and the bird-eye view
are greatly affected by the number of occu-
: Shift lever out of R (Reverse) operation pants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condi-
: Push the <CAMERA> button When the <CAMERA> button is pushed, Around tion and road grade.
View Monitor operates and the front view and
The Around View monitor starts if: birds-eye view are displayed j
1. If the tyres are replaced with different sized
tyres, the predictive course line and the bird-
R (Reverse) gear is selected The front view and birds-eye view are displayed eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
The <CAMERA> button is pushed j1 . When the <CAMERA> button is pushed
again j3 , the view on the screen on the passen- When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
The front parking sensors (where fitted) detect viewed in the monitor are further than they
gers side changes to the front-side view. Push-
an object. appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill,
ing the <CAMERA> button again turns the
objects viewed in the monitor are closer than
Starting with the shift lever operation Around View Monitor off.
they appear. Use the mirrors or actually look
When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re- To change the drivers side screen between front to properly judge distances to other objects.
verse) position Around View Monitor starts auto- view and rear view use the shift lever.
The vehicle width and predictive course lines are
matically and the rear view and birds-eye view
are displayed j2.
When the shift lever is not in the R (Reverse) wider than the actual width and course.
position and the vehicle speed increases above

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-7
how much the steering wheel is turned and will not bird-eye view is a pseudo view that is pro-
be displayed while the steering wheel is in the cessed by combining the views from the cam-
straight ahead position. eras on the outside mirrors, the front and the
rear of the vehicle.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle
speed is above approximately 30 km/h (20 MPH). Tall objects, such as a kerb or a vehicle, may
be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of
WARNING the views.

Objects in the monitor will appear visually op- Objects that are above the camera cannot be
posite than when viewed in the rear view and displayed.
NAA1452
outside mirrors.
Example The view for the bird-eye view may be mis-

Guiding lines
On a snow-covered or slippery road, there aligned when the camera position alters.
may be a difference between the predictive
course line and the actual course line.
A line on the ground may be misaligned and is
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and not seen as being straight at the seam of the
distances to objects with reference to the vehicle
body line jA , are displayed on the monitor.
The displayed lines on the rear view will ap- views. The misalignment will increase as the
pear slightly off to the right because the rear line proceeds away from the vehicle.
Distance guide lines: view camera is not installed in the rear centre
of the vehicle.
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
NOTE
Red line j
1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
When the monitor displays the front view and the
Yellow line j
2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft)
steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less
Green line j
3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft) from the neutral position, both the right and left
predictive course lines j6 are displayed. When
Green line j
4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft)
the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
Vehicle width guide lines and static predictive more, a line is displayed only on the opposite
course lines j
5: side of the turn. NAA1236

Indicate the vehicle width when reversing. Bird-eye view


The bird-eye view shows the overhead view of the
Dynamic predictive course lines j
6:
WARNING vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and
The dynamic predictive course lines will be dis- the predicted course to a parking space.
played on the monitor when the steering wheel is Objects in the bird-eye view will appear fur-
turned. The course lines will move depending on ther than the actual distance because the

4-8 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The vehicle icon j
1 shows the position of the ve- DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
hicle. AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
NOTE
WARNING
The size of the vehicle icon on the bird-eye view
may differ somewhat from the actual vehicle. The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line on the front and the rear view should
At first operation, the blind spot corner lines j
2 on
be used as a reference only when the vehicle is
all four corners of the vehicle icon are blinking yel-
on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed
low for about 3 seconds. The four corners j 3 of the
on the monitor is for reference only and may be
vehicle are displayed in red if parking sensor is not NAA1325 different than the actual distance between the
fitted, or is turned off. Frontside view, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models* vehicle and displayed objects.
NOTE Front-side view
The areas that the cameras cannot cover are *: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the
indicated in black. screen layout will be shown opposite.
Blind spot corner lines j2 blink (yellow) on all Guiding lines:
four corners of the vehicle icon as a reminder
CAUTION
to be cautious. This is not a malfunction.
The actual distance to objects may differ from
the distance shown.
Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front
end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line j
1 shows the front part of
the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line j
2 shows the vehicle width
including the outside mirror.
NAA1348 The extensions j3 of both the front j
1 and side j
2
Frontside view, Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models* lines are shown with a green dotted line.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-9
Moving near a projecting object
The dynamic predictive course lines j
A may show
that the vehicle is not touching the object. However,
the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the
actual moving course.

WARNING
The distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than the actual
distance between the vehicle and displayed ob-
jects.

NAA1374 NAA1375

Moving to a steep uphill Moving to a steep downhill


When moving the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide When moving the vehicle down a hill, the distance
lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are
closer than the actual distance. For example, the shown further than the actual distance. For example,
display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the
actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place j
B. actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place jB.
Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni- Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor further than it appears. tor closer than it appears.

4-10 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
NAA1349 SAA3575 NAA1376

The predictive course lines jA do not touch the There may be a small visible distance between the Moving closer to a projecting object
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit vehicle and the object in the birds-eye view j
B on
the object if it projects over the actual moving the monitor. The position jC is shown further than the position
course. jB in the display. However, the position j
C is actu-
ally at the same distance as the position jA . The
vehicle may hit the object when moving toward the
position j
A if the object projects over the actual
moving course.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-11
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) The yellow frame j 2 is displayed on each view in
WARNING the front view, front-wide view, rear view and rear-
The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can
inform the driver of the moving objects surrounding The MOD system is not a substitute for proper wide view modes.
vehicle operation and is not designed to pre- A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
the vehicle.
vent contact with the objects surrounding the MOD system is operative. A grey MOD icon is dis-
The MOD system detects moving objects by using vehicle. When manoeuvring, always use the played in the view where the MOD system is not
image processing technology on the image shown outside mirror and rear view mirror and turn operative.
on the Around View Monitor display. and check the surroundings to ensure it is
safe to manoeuvre.
The MOD system operates in the following condi- WARNING
tions when the camera view is displayed: The MOD system does not have the function
Do not use the MOD system when towing a
to detect the surrounding stationary objects.
When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position trailer (if available). The system may not func-
(XTRONIC and MT models) or P (Park) position tion properly.
(XTRONIC models) and the vehicle is stopped,
the MOD system detects the moving objects in Excessive noise (for example, audio system
volume or open vehicle window) will interfere
the bird-eye view.
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
When the shift lever is in the any position other
The MOD system performance will be limited
than R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed
according to environmental conditions and
is above 0 km/h and below approximately 8 km/h
surrounding objects such as:
(5 MPH), the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects in the front view. When there is low contrast between back-
NAA1499 ground and the moving objects.
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi- Front view / rear view*
tion and the vehicle speed is below approximately When there is blinking source of light.
8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects mov- *: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model, the screen
layout will be opposite. When strong light such as another vehi-
ing objects in the rear view. The MOD system
cles headlight or sunlight is present.
will not operate correctly if the back door is open. When the MOD system detects a moving object
surrounding the vehicle, the yellow frame will be dis- When camera orientation is not in its usual
The MOD icon will change to blue to show which
played on the view where the objects are detected position, such as when mirror is folded.
view is currently active.
and a chime will sound once. While the MOD sys- When there is dirt, water drops or snow on
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in tem continues to detect moving objects, the yellow the camera lens.
the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed frame continues to be displayed.
on the screen when in this view. When the position of the moving objects in
the display is not changed.

4-12 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The MOD system might detect flowing water AROUND VIEW MONITOR SETTINGS 2) Select the [Settings] key using the steering
droplets on the camera lens, white smoke wheel switch. Scroll by push up or down button
from the exhaust, moving shadows, etc. To switch the Moving Object Detection between on j
B , select by pressing button j
B.
or off, proceed as follows:
The MOD system may not function properly 3) Select the [Driving Aids] key.
depending on the speed, direction, distance
4) Select the [Parking Aids] key.
or shape of the moving objects.
5) Select the [Moving Objects Detection] key to
If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts
switch between on or off. If a marker is shown
where the camera is installed, leaving it mis-
the item is switched on.
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be al-
tered and the MOD system may not detect View malfunction
objects properly.
When the [ ! ] icon is displayed on the screen, there
When the temperature is extremely high or will be abnormal conditions in the Around View
low, the screen may not display objects NIC2204 Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving opera-
clearly. This is not a malfunction. tion but the system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Camera maintenance
When the [ X ] icon is displayed on the screen, the
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the
camera image may be receiving temporary elec-
MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the
tronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This
camera.
will not hinder normal driving operation but the sys-
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN tem should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer or
VIEW qualified workshop if it occurs frequently.

To adjust the display brightness of the Around View OPERATING TIPS


Monitor, use the settings described in the sepa-
rately provided NissanConnect owners manual. NAA1418
When the view is switched, the display images
on the screen may be displayed with some de-
Do not adjust the settings while the vehicle is mov- lay.
ing. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. 1) Press the steering wheel button to enter the ve-
hicle information display, see Vehicle informa- When the temperature is extremely high or low,
tion display in the 2. Instruments and controls the screen may not display objects clearly. This
section. is not a malfunction.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-13
VENTS

When strong light shines directly on to the cam- SIDE AND CENTRE VENTS
era, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is
not a malfunction.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
This is not a malfunction.
The colours of objects on the Around View Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from the actual colour
of objects. This is not a malfunction.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the
colour of the object may differ in a dark environ-
NAA1378
ment. This is not a malfunction. Centre vents
There may be differences in sharpness between
This symbol indicates that the vents are
each camera view of the bird-eye view.
m : closed. Moving the side control to this
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, position will close the vents.
the Around View Monitor may not display ob- Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-
jects clearly. Clean the camera. ing the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean desired position is achieved.
the camera. This will cause discoloration. To
clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
Do not damage the camera because the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any
wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened
with a mild detergent diluted with water.

4-14 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION

WARNING Whilst the engine is running, selecting airflow


to the front defogger will prevent the Stop/
Do not leave children or adults who would Start System automatically stopping the en-
normally require the support of others alone gine.
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a The Stop/Start System will prevent unneces-
closed vehicle could quickly become high sary fuel consumption and exhaust emis-
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju- sions. When the engine is stopped by the
ries to people or animals. Stop/Start System heater and air conditioner
performance may be reduced. To keep full
NAA1377 Do not use the recirculation mode for long heater and air conditioner performance, re-
Side vents
periods as it may cause the interior air to be- start the engine by pressing the Stop/Start
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is System OFF switch, or by turning the ignition
This symbol indicates that the vents are recommended that you use the outside air switch.
m : closed. Moving the side control to this mode in cold weather to keep the windows
For more information on the Stop/Start Sys-
position will close the vents. clear.
tem, see Stop/Start System (where fitted)
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-
ing the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the
Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/ in the 5. Starting and driving section.
ventilation or air conditioning controls while
desired position is achieved. driving. Odours from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up inside the air conditioner unit
NOTE and it can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
Condensation forms inside the air condition-
ing unit when the air conditioner is running, When parking, set the air recirculation mode
and is safely discharged underneath your ve- to off to allow fresh air flowing into the pas-
hicle. senger compartment. This should help reduc-
ing the odours inside the vehicle.
Traces of water on the ground are therefore
normal.
Models with Stop/Start System:
Whilst the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start
System, selecting airflow to the front defog-
ger will cause the engine to be automatically
restarted.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-15
Controls
Fan speed control dial m :

To switch the fan on or off and to control the fan


speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to
increase the fan speed. To decrease the fan speed,
turn the fan speed control dial anticlockwise.
Turning the dial completely anticlockwise turns off
the fan.
Temperature control dial:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired
air temperature from the vents and floor outlets.
Air flow control buttons:
Use these buttons to manually select the air flow
from the air outlets as described below:
: Air flows mainly from the windscreen defog-
ger outlets.
: Air flows from centre and side vents.
: Air flows mainly from floor outlets.
Air recirculation button m :
NIC2185
Manual air conditioner
Outside air circulation
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (For details, see Defogger switch in the
2. Instruments and controls section) Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the
j
1 Fan speed control dial OFF position to draw outside air into the pas-
j
6 Temperature control dial senger compartment (the indicator light goes
j
2 Windscreen defogger MAX button off). Use the OFF position for normal heating
j
7 Floor outlets airflow selection button
j
3 Air conditioner ON/OFF button ventilation, or air conditioner (where fitted) op-
j
8 Centre and side vent outlets airflow selection eration.
j
4 Air recirculation button button
j
5 Rear window defogger button j
9 Windscreen outlets airflow selection button

4-16 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Air recirculation Heating and defogging: select the set- For quick heating, press the air recirculation
ting. ( ) button to the ON position. Be sure to
Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the
return to the OFF position for normal heat-
ON position (the indicator light goes on). Use Ventilation: select the or setting.
ing (no indicator light) in order to avoid win-
the ON position in situations such as: driving
Windscreen defogging: select the set- dow fog and stale interior.
on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or
ting.
having maximum cooling from the air conditioner Windscreen defogger m (manual mode):
(where fitted). 3. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
Use this mode for defogging the windscreen as fol-
If the windows fog up, switch on the air condi- 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
lows:
tioning (where fitted). position.
1. Press the button.
A/C (Air Conditioner) button (where fitted): NOTE
The system will set the fan speed to maximum.
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioner on When selecting the or setting, turn Air circulation is cancelled, the airflow mode
or off. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indi- the temperature control dial to the desired and the air conditioner is activated automatically.
cator light illuminates. position between the middle and the maxi- Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets.
mum HOT (right) position.
Operation 2. Set the temperature control dial to the maximum
5. Press the A/C button (where fitted) to the ON (HOT) position.
The heater and air conditioner operate when the
position and the indicator light will come on.
engine is running. The air blower will operate even if 3. To switch off, press the button to return to
Switch this mode on for dehumidified heating or
the engine is turned off and the ignition switch is in the previous mode.
cooling.
the ON position.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
The air conditioner mode is used to cool and To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen, set
The air conditioner cooling function operates only the fan speed to the maximum position.
dehumidify. For quick cooling when the out-
when the engine is running and the fan is acti-
vated.
side temperature is high, select the air recir- As soon as possible after the windscreen has
culation mode position ( ). Be sure to re- been cleared of ice or fog, press the wind-
1. Press the air recirculation ( ) button to the turn to the outside air mode to avoid windows screen defogger button.
OFF position. from fogging-up and interior air from becom-
ing stale.
When the windscreen defogging mode is acti-
2. Use the airflow control buttons for: vated, the air conditioner will automatically
A visible mist may be seen coming from the switch on at outside temperatures above 2C
Cooling: select the or setting.
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is (28F) and the air recirculation mode will be
Heating: select the or setting. cooled rapidly this is not a malfunction. switched off.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-17
Operating tips NOTE

In order to improve the heater operation, clear The air recirculation mode should not be selected
any snow and ice from the wiper blade and air for either normal heating or defrosting.
inlet in front of the windscreen.
After parking in the sun, drive for two or three
minutes with the windows open to vent hot air

m
from the passenger compartment. Then close
the windows to allow the acceleration of the air
conditioners cooling operation.
Keep the windows closed while the air condi-
tioner is operating.
The air conditioning system should be operated
for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
HOT position, turn the air conditioner off. For
additional information, see Engine overheat in NAA1401
the 6. In case of emergency section. HEATING
Controls Settings
If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
Completely
temperature, the air conditioning system will au- j
1 Fan speed control dial
clockwise
tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
Air conditioner button
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on j
2
(where fitted)
OFF
a hot day.
j
3 Air recirculation button OFF
Quick reference charts j
4 Temperature control dial HOT
The following charts show the button, air intake and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, j
5 Air flow control button
m
cooling or defrosting.

4-18 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Air conditioner filter (where fitted)
The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter
which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter regularly. For filter replace-
ment, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-

mm
shop.
The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex-
tremely reduced or when the windows fog up
easily during air conditioning system operation.
Servicing air conditioner
The air conditioning system (where fitted) in your
NISSAN vehicle is charged with an environmentally
friendly refrigerant.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone
NAA1403 NAA1405 layer.
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING COOLING Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
Controls Settings Controls Settings quired when servicing your vehicles air conditioner.
j
1 Defogger MAX button ON
j
1 Fan speed control dial
Completely Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
j
2 Air conditioner button ON clockwise severe damage to the air conditioning system. See
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in
j
3 Air recirculation button OFF j
2
Air conditioner button
ON
(where fitted) the 9. Technical information section of this manual.
Completely
j
4 Temperature control dial ON (Max) A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
clockwise j
3 Air recirculation button
OFF (Normal) to service the air conditioning system.
j
4 Temperature control dial COLD

j
5 Air flow control button
m

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-19
Windscreen button in the 2. Instruments and
controls section)
j
8 Rear window defogger button
(For details, see Defogger switch in the
2. Instruments and controls section)
j
9 Dual zone control ON/OFF button
j
10 Floor outlets airflow selection button

j
11 Centre and side vent outlets airflow selection
button
j
12 Windscreen outlets airflow selection button

j
13 Automatic climate control button

j
14 Air conditioner ON/OFF button

WARNING
Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others alone
in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high
NIC2182 enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju-
Automatic air conditioner with windscreen defogger (where fitted) ries to people or animals.
AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE AIR j
4 Fan speed control buttons
Do not use the recirculation mode for long
CONDITIONER (where fitted) j
5 ON/OFF button periods as it may cause the interior air to be-
come stale and the windows to fog up. It is
j
1 Windscreen defogger MAX button j
6 Temperature control dial (Drivers side (RHD)/ recommended that you use the outside air
j
2 Temperature control dial (Drivers side (LHD)/ Passengers side (LHD)) mode in cold weather to keep the windows
Passengers side (RHD)) j
7 ThermaClear Heated Windscreen button clear.
j
3 Air recirculation button (where fitted)
(For details, see ThermaClear Heated

4-20 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Do not adjust the positioning of the heating/ 1. Press the AUTO button (the indicator light will Airflow control buttons:
ventilation or air conditioning controls while illuminate). Use these buttons to manually select the air flow
driving. form these outlets as described below:
2. Operate the drivers side temperature control dial
NOTE to set the desired temperature. : Air flows mainly from the windscreen defog-
ger outlets.
The air conditioner cooling function operates Adjust the temperature to about 22C (72F) for
: Air flows from centre and side vents.
only when the engine is running, and the am- normal operation.
bient temperature is above -2C (28F). 3. Drivers side and passenger side temperatures : Air flows mainly from floor outlets.
The air conditioner can be used to dehumidify can be set independently using the individual Windscreen defogger m (manual mode):
when heating, or to reduce air temperature temperature control dial. When the passenger
and dehumidify when cooling. This is possible side temperature control dial is turned, the DUAL Use this mode for defogging the windscreen as fol-
in both auto or manual control mode as long indicator light will come on. To turn off the pas- lows:
as the fan speed is at minimum (first bar) or senger side temperature control, press the DUAL
1. Press the button.
higher. button.
The system will set the fan speed to maximum.
When the AUTO mode is selected, the tem- NOTE Air circulation is cancelled, the airflow mode
perature of the passenger compartment will and the air conditioner is activated automatically.
be maintained automatically. Air flow distribu- A visible mist may be seen coming from the Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets.
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
tion and fan speed will also be controlled au- 2. To switch off, press the button to return to
cooled rapidly, this is not a malfunction.
tomatically. the previous mode or the AUTO button for auto
Heating (AUTO mode): climate control mode.
Controls
Use this mode for heating purposes only.
NOTE NOTE
1. Press the A/C button to turn off the air condi-
Before any selection or change is made, press tioner cooling function (A/C indicator light goes To quickly defrost/defog the windscreen, set
the AUTO button to activate the heater and air off). the fan speed to the maximum position.
conditioner system.
2. Select the desired temperature with the tempera- As soon as possible after the windscreen has
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO ture control dial. been cleared of ice or fog, press either the
mode): windscreen defogger button or AUTO button.
This mode may be used all year round. The system
Do not set the temperature at a lower level than
When the windscreen defogging mode is acti-
the one of the outside air temperature. Other-
works automatically to control the inside tempera- wise the system may not work properly. vated, the air conditioner will automatically
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed after the switch on at outside temperatures above 2C
preferred temperature is set manually. This mode is not recommended if the windscreen (28F) and the air recirculation mode will be
fogs up. switched off.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-21
Heating and defogging (Manual mode): To turn the system on/off: If the engine coolant reaches an extremely high
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- Press the ON/OFF button to turn the system on or temperature, the air conditioning system will au-
screen. off. tomatically turn off. This may happen for example
if the engine runs at idle speed for a long time on
Use the airflow control buttons to select the Operating tips a hot day.
button is pressed. Switch on the air-conditioning to
improve the defogging and adjust the preferred fan In order to improve the heater operation, clear Air conditioner filter
speed and temperature. the snow and ice from the wiper blade and air
inlet in front of the windscreen. The air conditioning system is equipped with a filter
Fan speed control m (Manual mode): which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure
When the engine coolant temperature and out- the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
Press the fan speed control buttons to adjust the fan side air temperature are low, the airflow from the ciently, replace the filter regularly. To replace the fil-
speed. floor outlets may not operate for a maximum of ter, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.
Press the AUTO button to change the fan speed to After the coolant temperature has warmed up, The filter should be replaced if the airflow is ex-
automatic mode. the airflow from the floor outlets will operate nor- tremely reduced or when the windows fog up
mally. easily while operating the heater or air condition-
Air recirculation:
ing system.
Use this mode to recirculate interior air inside the After parking in the sun, drive for two or three
Servicing air conditioner
passenger compartment in situations such as driv- minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
ing on a dust raised road, avoiding traffic fumes or from the passenger compartment. Then, close The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle
having maximum cooling from the air conditioner. the windows. This will allow the acceleration of is charged with an environmentally friendly refriger-
the air conditioners cooling operation. ant.
Press the < > button to recirculate interior air.
The indicator light illuminates and the air conditioner Keep windows closed while the air conditioner is NISSAN Blue Citizenship
will automatically come on. operating.
This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone
When the air recirculation mode is switched off, out- The air conditioning system should be operated layer.
side air is drawn into the passenger compartment. for about 10 minutes, at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system due to lack Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
Outside air circulation : quired when servicing the NISSAN air conditioner.
of lubrication.
Use this mode to draw outside air into the passen- Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
ger compartment for normal heating, ventilation or If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds the severe damage to the air conditioning system. See
HOT position, turn the air conditioner off. For Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in
air conditioner operation.
additional information, see Engine overheat in the 9. Technical information section.
Press the < > button to change the air intake the 6. In case of emergency section.
from the air recirculation to the outside air mode. A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
The indicator light ( ) turns off. to service the air conditioning system.

4-22 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
AUDIO SYSTEM

WARNING
The player may skip while driving on rough ANTENNA
roads.
Do not adjust the audio system while driving.
Occasionally, the CD player may not function
The audio system operates when the ignition switch when the compartment temperature is ex-
is in the Acc or ON position. If you want to listen to tremely high. Decrease the temperature be-
the radio or CD while the engine is not running, turn fore use.
the ignition switch to the Acc position. Do not use
for an extended period of time with the engine
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

stopped. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,


covered with finger prints, or that have pin
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS holes may not work properly.
NAA956Z
NOTE The following CDs may not work properly.
Models with NissanConnect system, see the au- Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Removing the antenna
dio operation precautions in the separately pro-
vided NissanConnect Owners Manual. Recordable compact discs (CD-R) To remove the antenna, hold the lower part of the
antenna and turn it anticlockwise.
Radio Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
CAUTION
Radio reception is affected by station signal Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction. Make sure to remove the antenna before the ve-
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
hicle enters a garage with a low ceiling or an
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adaptor
automatic car wash otherwise the antenna can
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
are normally caused by these external influences.
CDs that are not round be damaged.

Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle may


CDs with a paper label
influence radio reception quality.
Use the antenna for the best reception.
Compact Disc (CD) player
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or
ventilate the player completely.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-23
FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (where fitted)

Switch between the audio sources (CD, USB,


AUX, BT Audio)(if connected)
6. Telephone button
7. Radio mode: TUNE dial
Audio unit mode: MENU dial
Confirmation (ENTER) button
8. Back button
9. Radio mode: Preset button
USB/MP3 CD or Phone mode: Quick search
button
10. SETUP button
11. Radio mode: Preset buttons
12. Fast Forward (Cue)/Forward Track and
Rewind/Previous Track buttons
13. Radio mode: Preset button
CD/iPod/USB/Bluetooth audio mode: MIX
button
14. Traffic Announcement (TA) button

NAA1387
15. Radio mode: Preset button
CD/iPod/USB/Bluetooth audio mode: Repeat
(RPT) button
1. (Day/Night) button illumination brightness levels between daytime
(Display brightness (Day/Night mode) button) setting and nighttime setting independent of 16. Power ONOFF button/Volume control (VOL)
Turn the MENU button to set the display headlamp status. knob
brightness 17. DISP button
2. CD slot
The illumination brightness level is linked to the Provides on screen information when available
3. Display (music tags, RDS, etc.)
headlight switch. When the headlights are
switched ON the brightness is dimmed 4. CD eject button 18. RADIO button
automatically. Press the button to toggle
5. MEDIA button

4-24 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
AUDIO MAIN OPERATION The radio is able to receive multiple kinds of audio Manual tuning
transmissions:
The audio unit operates when the ignition switch is
FM When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency
in Acc or ON position.
manually access the [FM List] and turn the <MENU>
m Power ON/OFF button AM dial until the desired station is tuned in.
Radio band select buttons The frequency increases or decreases in steps of
Press the button to switch on the audio unit. If
Press the <RADIO> button to change the audio 100 kHz on the FM band, and 9 kHz on the AM
the audio unit was switched off using the ignition
transmission source as follows: band.
switch, it can also be switched on with the ignition
switch. The source that was playing immediately FM1 FM2 AM FM1 WARNING
before the unit was switched off will resume playing
and the volume will be set to the previous volume When <RADIO> button is pressed, the radio will The radio should not be tuned while driving in
level. come on at the last received radio station. If audio is order for full attention to be given to the driving
already playing using one of the other input sources operation.
The audio unit can be switched off by pressing , (iPod, Bluetooth, CD, USB, AUX-in) pressing the
or by turning the ignition switch to the OFF or <RADIO> button will switch off the playing source SEEK tuning buttons
LOCK position. mode and the last received radio station will be se-
m Volume (VOL) level control lected. FM mode:
Pressing the or button starts the tuning
Setting preset stations mode. A short press of the button will increase or
Turn the <VOL> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
adjust the volume level. Auto populating the [FM List]: decrease the frequency a single step. Pressing the
When the <RADIO> button is pressed for more than button longer will activate the seek mode. The radio
The audio unit is equipped with a speed control vol- tuner seeks from low to high or high to low frequen-
1.5 seconds the six stations with the strongest sig-
ume function, this means that the audio system au- cies and stops at the next broadcasting station. Dur-
nals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of the
tomatically adjusts the volume level in relation to ing seek mode, the audio output is muted. If no
band. During the search, a notification message
vehicle speed. For details, see [Speed Volume] broadcasting station can be found within the com-
[Updating FM List] appears in the display and the
menu later in this section. plete band cycle, it will return to the initial frequency.
sound is muted until the operation is complete. Once
RADIO OPERATION completed, the radio reverts to the previously se- Preset station buttons j
1j2j
3j4j
5j6
lected radio station.
When the (power ON/OFF) button is pressed, Pressing a preset button for less than 2 seconds will
the audio unit will switch on with the last received select the stored radio station.
radio station, if the audio unit was previously
switched off in radio mode.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-25
Pressing a preset button for more than 2 seconds The AF function compares signal strengths and If <TA> is pressed during a traffic announcement,
while in the [FM list] or radio main screen will cause selects the station with the optimum reception the traffic announcement interrupt mode is can-
the station currently being received to be stored conditions for the currently tuned-in station. celled. The TA mode returns to the standby mode
against that preset button. and the audio unit returns to the previous source.
RDS functions
Twelve stations (if available) can be stored in the
Programme Service (PS) function (station name SETUP BUTTON
FM bands. (Six each for FM1 and FM2) display function):
Six stations (if available) can be set for the AM FM:
band. When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or
If the battery is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, manual tuning, the RDS data is received and the
the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset PS name is displayed.
To configure [Audio], [Clock], [Radio], and [Lan-
the desired stations after battery connection or fuse
TA Traffic announcement guage] settings, perform the following procedure:
replacement.
This function operates in FM (Radio) mode. This 1. Press the <SETUP> button.
Radio Data System (RDS) operation function will still operate in the background if any
2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlock-
(where fitted) media source is selected (CD, USB or MEDIA
wise, the display will appear in the following or-
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital mode).
der:
information is transmitted by FM radio stations in Pressing the <TA> button selects the TA mode.
[Audio] [Clock] [Radio] [Language]
addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The The TA indicator is displayed while TA mode is
RDS provides information services such as station on. After the desired levels have been set, press either
name, traffic information, or news. the (Back) button repeatedly, or the <SETUP>
When <TA> is pressed again. The mode will be
button.
NOTE switched off and the TA indicator will disappear
from the display. Audio adjustments
In some countries or regions, some of these
services may not be available. Traffic announcement interrupt function: 1. Press the <SETUP> button to enter the setup
Alternative Frequency (AF) mode: When a traffic announcement is received, the an- menu screen then select [Audio].

The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode. nouncement is tuned in and the display shows a 2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlock-
notification message with the radio station name e.g. wise, the display will appear in the following or-
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio), AUX or [TA: Radio 1]. der:
CD mode (if FM was previously selected in the
radio mode). Once the traffic announcement has finished, the unit [Sound] [AUX in] [Speed Volume] [Bass
returns to the source that was active before the traf- Boost] [Audio Default]
fic announcement started.

4-26 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
[Sound] menu: [AUX in] menu: [Bass Boost] menu:
Submenus in the sound menu: Use this control to adjust the volume output from the Switch [Bass boost] [ON] or [OFF]
[Bass] Use this control to enhance or auxiliary source.
[Audio default] menu:
attenuate bass response sound. Turn the <MENU> dial anticlockwise or clockwise
to select [Low], [Medium], or [High] mode then The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a fac-
Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
press <ENTER> to confirm. tory default. Select [Yes] to change all settings back
or anticlockwise to adjust the bass
to the factory preset settings. Select [No] to exit the
settings then press <ENTER> to Set the AUX-in volume. Select one of the submenus menu keeping the current settings.
confirm. in the [AUX in] menu:
[Treble] Use this control to enhance or Setting the clock
attenuate the treble. [Low]
The clock menu screen set up screen will appear
Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise [Medium] when selecting the [Clock] item from the set up
or anticlockwise to adjust the
[High] menu.
treble settings then press
<ENTER> to confirm. [Speed Volume] menu: [Set Time]:
[Balance] Use this control to adjust the bal- Set the audio system to automatically adjust the vol- Select [Set Time] then adjust the clock as follows:
ance of the volume between the ume level in relation to vehicle speed.
left and right speakers. 1. The hour display will start flashing. Turn the
Turn the <MENU> dial anticlockwise or clockwise <MENU> dial to adjust the hour.
Turn the <MENU> dial to adjust the volume, higher (more) bars mean the
anticlockwise or clockwise to volume level relatively changes more when the ve- 2. Press the <ENTER> button. The minute display
adjust the left/right balance then hicle speed increase or decreases. Press <ENTER> will start flashing.
press <ENTER> to confirm. to confirm.
[Fade] Use this control to adjust the bal- 3. Turn the <MENU> dial to adjust the minute.
ance of the volume between the This mode controls the volume output from the 4. Press <ENTER> to finish the clock adjustment.
front and rear speakers. speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed.
When [Speed Volume] is displayed, turn the [On/Off]:
Turn the <MENU> dial
anticlockwise or clockwise to <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust Set the clock display between on or off when the
adjust the front/rear balance then the volume level. audio unit is turned off.
press <ENTER> to confirm. Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed
volume feature. Increasing the speed volume setting If set in the [ON] position, the clock will be dis-
results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly played when the audio unit is turned off either by
with vehicle speed. Once chosen, press <ENTER> pressing the button or when the ignition switch
to save the setting. is placed in the OFF position.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-27
[Format]: COMPACT DISC (CD) OPERATION An error notification message will be
Set the clock display between 24-hour mode and displayed when inserting a wrong disc type
The CD player can play a music CD or an encoded (e.g. DVD), or the player cannot read the CD
12-hour clock mode. MP3/WMA CD and while listening to those CDs disc. Eject the disc and insert another disc.
[Radio] menu music information tags (track and artist information)
can be displayed (when CD encoded with text is MEDIA button
For activation or deactivation details, see SETUP being used).
button later in this section. Load a CD disc. After a short loading period the CD
Press the <MEDIA> button and the CD (if loaded) starts playing.
Language settings will start to play. If the disc was already loaded:
Select the appropriate language and press the When <MEDIA> is pressed and the radio or another Press the <MEDIA> button (depending on other
<ENTER> button. Upon completion, the screen will source mode is already operating, it will automati- connected audio sources if necessary multiple
automatically adapt the language setting. cally turn off the playing source and the CD play times) to select CD. Playing starts from the track
mode will start. that was being played when the CD play mode was
[AUTO]
switched off.
(Factory preset language connected with the CAUTION
meter language) Audio main operation
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could
[Chinese] damage the player. List view:
[Chinese Simplified] Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs. While the track is being played, either press the
<ENTER> button or turn the MENU dial to display
[Deutsch] CD insert (CD player) the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select
[Espaol] Insert the CD disc into the slot with the label side a track from the list, or a track to start listening from,
facing up. The disc will be guided automatically into turn the <MENU> dial then press <ENTER>.
[Franais]
the slot and will start playing. After loading the disc, Press the button to return to the song.
[Italiano] track information will be displayed. Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
[Nederlands] NOTE
Reverse (Review) buttons:
[Polski]
The CD player accepts normal audio CD or
When the (Cue) or (Review) button is
pressed continuously, the track will be played at
[Portugus] CD recorded with MP3/WMA files.
high speed. When the button is released, the track
[Trke] Inserting a CD recorded with MP3/WMA files, will be played at normal playing speed.
the audio unit will automatically detect and
[UK English]
[MP3CD] will be indicated.
[]

4-28 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Track up/down buttons: Repeat button: Track details:
A long press on the j5 button will turn the
Pressing the or button once, the track will Push the j1 button and the current track will display into a detailed overview and after a few sec-
be skipped forward to the next track or backward to be played continuously. onds it returns to the main display, or press
the beginning of the current played track. Press the
button: j5 briefly.
or button more than once to skip through
the tracks. Push the j2 button and all the tracks in the
Folder browsing: current folder (MP3 CD/USB) or playlist (iPod) will
be played in a random order.
If the recorded media contains folders with music
files, pressing the or button will play in When the entire folder/playlist has been played the
sequence the tracks of each folder. system will start playing the next folder/playlist. Quick search:
To select a preferred folder: button: When a MP3 CD with recorded music information
tags (ID3text tags) is being played from list view
1. Press the <ENTER> button or turn the <MENU> mode, a quick search can be performed to find a
While a CD with recorded music information tags
dial and a list of tracks in the current folder is dis- track from the list.
(CD-text/ID3text tags) is being played, the title of
played.
the played track is displayed. If the title information Push the <A-Z> j 6 button then turn the <MENU>
2. Turn the <MENU> dial for the preferred folder. is not provided then [Track] is displayed. dial for the first alphabetic/numerical letter of the
3. Press <ENTER> to access the folder. Press When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly, track title then press <ENTER>. When found, a list
<ENTER> again to start playing the first track or further information about the track can be displayed of the available tracks will be displayed. When there
turn the <MENU> dial, and press <ENTER> to along with the track title as follows: is no match (the display shows [No match] the next
select another track. item will be shown. Select, and press <ENTER> to
CD: play the preferred track.
If the current selected folder contains sub folders,
Track time Artist name Album title Track CD eject button
press <ENTER>, a new screen with a list of sub
time
folders will be displayed. Turn the <MENU> dial for CD player:
the sub folder then press <ENTER> to select. Se- CD with MP3/WMA:
lect the [Root] folder item when songs are recorded Press the (eject) button and the CD will be
Track time Artist name Album title Folder ejected.
additionally in the root folder.
name Track time
To return to the previous folder screen, press . Ejecting CD (with ignition switch in OFF or
The track name is always displayed. LOCK):
When the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK
position it is possible to eject the currently played
CD. However the audio unit will not be activated.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-29
Press the button and the CD will be ejected. Press the <MEDIA> button for the AUX mode. MEDIA button
Use the play mode of the device to play the audio.
NOTE To operate the USB device press <MEDIA> once or
USB MEMORY OPERATION repeatedly until [USB] is available.
When the CD is ejected and not removed
(where fitted)
within 8 seconds, it will automatically retract Audio main operation
into the slot to protect it from damage. Connecting USB memory The following operations are identical to the audio
If an error message appears in the display, Open the console lid and connect a USB memory main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
press to eject the faulty CD and insert an- stick or another USB device. The display will show tion. For details, see Audio main operation earlier
other CD or check if the ejected CD is in- the notification message [USB Detected Please in this section.
serted upside down. Wait...] for a few seconds, while it is reading the
data.
List view
The AUX and USB sockets are located in the centre
console underneath the armrest. If the audio system has been turned off while the Quick search
USB memory was playing, pressing will start
the USB device operation.
,

CAUTION
MIX (Random play)
RPT (Repeat track)
Do not force the USB device into the USB
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up- Folder browsing
side-down into the port may damage the USB
device and the port. Make sure that the USB
device is connected correctly into the USB
port. (Some USB devices come with a
NAA1397 mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is
facing the correct direction before inserting Quick search:
j
1 USB the device.) When a USB device with recorded music informa-
j
2 AUX Do not locate objects near the USB device to tion tags (ID3text tags) is being played from list
prevent the objects from leaning on the USB view mode, a quick search can be performed to find
AUX SOCKET device and the port. Pressure from the ob- a track from the list.

Audio main operation


jects may damage the USB device and the Push the <A-Z> j 6 button then turn the <MENU>
port. dial for the first alphabetic/numerical letter of the
Open the console lid and connect the AUX jack of a track title then press <ENTER>. When found, a list
compatible player (e.g. MP3 player) to the socket of the available tracks will be displayed. When there
j2.

4-30 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
is no match (the display shows [No match] the next operation. During the connection, the iPod can Make sure that the iPod/iPhone is updated
item will be shown. Select, and press <ENTER> to only be operated with the audio controls. with the latest firmware.
play the preferred track.
* iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., iPod Shuffle and iPod mini cannot be used
button j
5 registered in the U.S. and other countries. with this system.

While a track with recorded music information tags


CAUTION Full functionality of iPhone USB and Bluetooth
Audio may not be available to the user if the
(ID3tags) is being played, the title of the played Do not force the iPod cable into the USB
same device is connected by USB and Blue-
track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then port. Inserting the iPod cable tilted or up-
tooth simultaneously.
a notification message is displayed. side- down into the port may damage the
iPod cable and the port. Make sure that the MEDIA button
When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly, iPod cable is connected correctly into the
further information about the track can be displayed USB port. (Some iPod cables come with a To operate the iPod press <MEDIA> once or re-
along with the track title as follows: peatedly until [iPod <Name>] is shown.
mark as a guide. Make sure that the
Track time Artist name Album title Track mark is facing the correct direction before
time inserting the iPod cable.)
Track details: Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to
prevent the objects from leaning on the iPod
A long press on the j5 button will turn the
cable and the port. Pressure from the ob-
display into a detailed overview and after a few sec- Audio main operation
jects may damage the iPod cable and the
onds it returns to the main display, or press Interface:
port.
j5 briefly.
Compatibility: The interface for iPod operation shown on the
iPod PLAYER OPERATION audio system display is similar to the iPod inter-
(where fitted) NOTE face. Use the <MENU> dial and the <ENTER> but-
Connecting iPod At the time of publication, this audio system ton to play a track on the iPod.
was tested with the latest iPod players/iP- The following items can be chosen from the menu
Open the console lid and connect the iPod cable to hone available. Due to the frequent update list screen.
the USB connector. The battery of the iPod will be of consumer devices like MP3 players,
charged during the connection to the vehicle. The NISSAN cannot guarantee that all new iPod [Playlists]
display will show the notification message [iPod players/iPhone launched will be compatible
<Name> Detected...] for a few seconds, while it is with this audio system.
[Artist]
reading the data. [Albums]
Some iPod operations may not be available
If the audio system has been turned off while the with this system. [Tracks]
iPod was playing, pressing will start the iPod

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-31
[Composers] Track details:
[Genre] A long press on the j5 button, the screen

m
displays the song title, artist name, and album title.
[Podcasts] After a few seconds it returns to the main display or
For further information about each item, see the press j
5 briefly.
iPod owners manual.
BLUETOOTH OPERATION NOTE
The following operations are identical to the audio
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera- The audio system only supports Bluetooth de-
tion. For details, see Audio main operation earlier vices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
in this section. Profile) version 1.4 or earlier.
List view BLUETOOTH settings
, To pair a device, make sure the Bluetooth is
switched on and use the [Scan device] key or the
MIX (Random play)
[Pair device] key For details, see [Scan devices]
RPT (Repeat track) later in this section.
NAA1392
Folder browsing *: a device with bluetooth capabilities Up to 5 different Bluetooth devices can be con-
m button j
5 Regulatory information
nected. However, only one device can be used at a
time. If 5 different Bluetooth registered devices are
Bluetooth is a trademark registered, a new device can only replace one of the
While a track with recorded music information tags
5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to
(ID3tags) is being played, the title of the played
track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then
m owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
delete one of the existing paired devices. For de-
tails, see [Del. device] later in this section.
a notification message is displayed. CE statement
When successfully paired a notification message
When the j5 button is pressed repeatedly, Hereby Yanfeng Visteon Automotive Electronics
will be displayed, then the audio system display will
further information about the track can be displayed Co., Ltd. declares that this system is in compliance
return to the current audio source display. During
along with the track title as follows: with the essential requirements and other relevant
connection the following status icons will be dis-
Track time Artist name Album title Track provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
played (top left of the display): Signal strength
time ( ), Battery status* ( ) and Bluetooth ON
( ).
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue-
tooth device must be recharged soon.

4-32 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac- [Del. device] Type B:
cording to device type and compatibility. See the The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted.
Bluetooth owners manual for further details. password] together with a 6 digit code
NOTE
[Bluetooth] will be displayed. The unique and identi-
cal code should be displayed on the de-
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
For device details, see your audio/mobile tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle
vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
phone Owners Manual. device.
Bluetooth module will be cancelled.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
For assistance with the Bluetooth audio/ [Scan devices]:
mobile phone integration, please visit your lo- [Pair device]:
cal NISSAN dealer. 1) Press the button. Select [Scan device]
The audio unit searches bluetooth devices and Turn the audio unit Bluetooth on. See [Blue-
To set up the Bluetooth system with a device the shows all visible devices. tooth] description.
following items are available: Use the audio unit to pair:
Make sure your Bluetooth device is visible at this
Press the button. Select the [Pair Device]
time.
key.
2) Select the device to be paired. The pairing procedure depends on the Blue-
Use the <MENU> dial and press to select. tooth device to be connected:
3) The pairing procedure may depend on the de- 1) Device without PIN code:
[Scan devices] vice to be connected:
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys- 1) Device without PIN code: cally connected without any further input.
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be The Bluetooth connection will be automati- 2) Device with PIN code:
registered. cally connected without any further input. Two different ways of pairing are possible
[Pair device] 2) Device with PIN code: depending on the device, for the correct pro-
Two different ways of pairing are possible cedure details, see [Scan devices] earlier
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys- in this section.
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be depending on the device:
registered. Type A: Use the Bluetooth audio/mobile phone device
The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000 to pair:
[Sel. device]
will be displayed. 1) Follow the instructions in the owners manual
Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be Confirm the PIN code on the device. for the Bluetooth enabled device to search
selected for connection. The Bluetooth connection will be made. for the audio unit.
If the search mode finds the audio unit it will
be shown on the device display.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-33
2) Select the audio unit shown as [My Car]. the Bluetooth signal on, press <ENTER> and a Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
follow up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and Reverse (Review) buttons:
3) Follow the instructions in the owners manual
press <ENTER> to display the Bluetooth settings When the (Cue) or (Review) button is
for the Bluetooth enabled device to estab-
menu screen. pressed continuously, the track will be played at
lish a connection with the audio unit.
high speed. When the button is released, the track
4) Enter the PIN code shown on the relevant will be played at normal playing speed.
device with the devices own keypad, and
press the confirmation key on the device it- Track up/down buttons:
self.
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth device own- Pressing the or button once, the track will
ers manual for further details. be skipped forward to the next track or backward to
the beginning of the current played track. Press the
[Sel. device]: or button more than once to skip through
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth au- the tracks.
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or NAA1203
registered with the Bluetooth audio system. If the
m button
list contains devices then select the appropriate de-
vice to connect to the Bluetooth audio system.
Bluetooth audio streaming main If the song contains music information tags (ID3
operation tags), the title of the played song will be displayed.
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the If tags are not provided then the display will not
capability of the registered device: Turn the ignition switch to the Acc or ON position. show any messages.
If the audio system was turned off while the Blue-
: Mobile phone integration tooth audio was playing, pressing the < > but- When the button is pressed repeatedly fur-
ton will start the Bluetooth audio streaming. ther information about the song can be displayed
: Audio streaming (A2DP Advanced Audio
along with the song title.
Distribution Profile) MEDIA button:
[Del. device]: A long press on will turn the display into a
To operate the Bluetooth audio streaming use the
detailed overview which after a few seconds returns
A registered device can be removed from the Blue- following method:
to the main display; or press briefly.
tooth audio system. Select a registered device then
press <ENTER> to confirm to deletion.
Press <MEDIA> repeatedly until [BT Audio] is
shown.
[Bluetooth]: The type of display, j
A or j
B , shown on the audio
If Bluetooth has been switched off a notification system can vary depending on the Bluetooth ver-
message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue- sion of the device.
tooth] from the phone menu (press ). To switch

4-34 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Bluetooth mobile phone feature
This system offers a hands-free facility for your mo-
bile telephone with Bluetooth to enhance driving
safety, and comfort.
For details, see Mobile phone integration for FM
AM radio with CD player (where fitted) later in this
section.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-35
Specification chart

Supported media CD-R, CD-ROM, CD-RW, USB 2.0 MSC


CD Size 12 cm diameter. up to 1.9 mm thickness
Supported file systems for CD ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems for USB FAT-16, FAT-32
Supported versions *1 MP3 Version MPEG1, Layer 3
Sampling frequency 32 KHz - 44.1 KHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, 288, 320, Kbps,
VBR *4
WMA *3 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 16 KHz, 22.05 KHz, 32 KHz, 44.1KHz, 48 kHz
Bit rate 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 Kbps, VBR *4
AAC Version MPEG-4, AAC
Sampling frequency 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
Bit rate 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 Kbps, VBR *4
Tag information (Song title and Artist CD CDDA
and Album name) MP3 ID3 tag ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.4
WMA WMA tag
AAC AAC tag
Tracks/Files support CDDA 99 tracks
MP3/WMA/AAC in CD 999 files
USB 30000 files

4-36 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Folders support 100 folders in CD
2500 folders in USB
Depth Till 8, Deeper folders shall be under 8, subject to the maximum.
Playlists support in USB M3U, WPL, PLS 1000 playlists.
Text character support Adjustable character length, File Name: Min 11 Characters ( Max 30 Characters) ID3 TAG : Min 24
depending upon content of Characters. (Max 60 Characters) *5
media.
Displayable character codes *2 Unicode, ISO885915(French), 01:ASCll, 02: ISO-8859-1, ISO885915(French), ISO88595(Russian Cyrillic),
ISO88595(Russian Cyrillic), 03: UNICODE(UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Ncn-BOM Big
GB180302000(Chinese), BIG- Endian), 05: UNICODE(UTF-8), 06:UNICODE(Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian),
5(Taiwanese), KSX1001 07: SHIFT-JIS, GB180302000(Chinese), BIG-5(Taiwanese), KSX1001
2002(Korean) 2002(Korean)
Browsing File/Folder browsing for CD/MP3, USB
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 Kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*3 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
*5 Support 128 Bytes but it depends on display width and character type.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-37
NISSANCONNECT (where fitted) STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (where fitted)

MAIN OPERATION Track up/down (in CD/USB/iPod/BT Audio


modes)
Push the or button to select the next
track or to return to the beginning of the present
track. Push several times to skip forward or skip
back through the tracks.
m Volume control buttons
Push the or + button to adjust the volume
LNV2389Z
level.
NAA1383

For details, see the separately provided NissanCon-


nect Owners Manual. The audio unit can be operated by using the con-
trols on the steering wheel.
j
A Seek up/Seek down buttons
j
B Volume control buttons
To use the steering wheel audio switch, push the
power ON button of the audio unit with the ignition
switch in either the Acc or ON position.
m or m Seek up/Seek down
button
Preset station change (radio mode)
Push the or button to select one of the
preset radio stations.
Seek tuning (radio mode)
Push and hold the or button to start the
tuning mode. The radio tuner seeks from low to
high or high to low frequencies and stops at the
next broadcasting station.

4-38 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
MOBILE PHONE INTEGRATION FOR FM AM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
(where fitted)

Not for models with NissanConnect system, see the separately provided Owners Manual. 1 Microphone location (Located in roof console)
2 Supported mobile phone with bluetooth
capabilities
3 Audio unit with switches for phone control
4 Steering wheel switches for phone control
BLUETOOTH MOBILE PHONE
FEATURE

WARNING
Whilst driving, using the mobile phone is ex-
tremely dangerous because it significantly im-
pairs your concentration and diminishes your re-
action capabilities to sudden changes on the
road, and it may lead to a fatal accident. This
applies to all phone call situations such as when
receiving an incoming call, during a phone con-
versation, when calling through the phone book
search, etc.
CAUTION
Certain country jurisdictions prohibit the use of
the mobile phone in the car without hands-free
support.
NAA1399
This chapter provides information about the NISSAN
hands-free phone system using a Bluetooth con-
nection.
Bluetooth is a wireless radio communication stan-
dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your
mobile telephone to enhance driving comfort.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-39
In order to use your mobile phone with the Blue- NOTE To setup the Bluetooth system to pair (connect or
tooth of the audio system, the mobile phone must register) your preferred mobile phone, follow the fol-
first be setup. For details, see BLUETOOTH For models with NissanConnect (Audio with
lowing procedure.
Navigation system) see the separately pro-
settings later in this section. Once it has been To pair a device, use the [Scan device] key or the
vided Owners Manual.
setup, the hands-free mode is automatically acti- [Pair device] key.
vated on the registered mobile phone (via Blue- For details, see your mobile phones Owners Up to 5 different Bluetooth devices can be con-
tooth) when it comes into range. Manual. nected. However, only one device can be used at a
time. If 5 different Bluetooth registered devices are
A notification message appears on the audio display For assistance with your mobile phone inte-
registered, a new device can only replace one of the
when the phone is connected, when an incoming gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer.
5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to
call is being received, as well as when a call is initi-
delete one of the existing paired devices. For de-
ated.
tails, see BLUETOOTH settings later in this sec-
When a call is active, the audio system, microphone tion.
(located in the ceiling in front of the rear view mir-
When successfully paired a notification message
ror), and steering wheel switches enable hands-free
will be displayed, then the audio system display will
communication.
return to the current audio source display. During
If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio, connection the following status icons will be dis-
CD, iPod, USB audio, Bluetooth audio or AUX played (top left of the display): Signal strength
source mode will be muted and will stay muted until ( ), Battery status* ( ) and Bluetooth ON
NAA1398
the active call has ended. ( ).
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue-
The Bluetooth system may not be able to connect
with your mobile phone for the following reasons: j
1 Phone book quick search button A-Z tooth device must be recharged soon.
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac-
The mobile phone is too far away from the ve- j
2 (Back) button
cording to device type and compatibility. See the
hicle. j
3 Phone button Bluetooth owners manual for further details.
The Bluetooth mode on your mobile phone has j
4 <MENU> or <ENTER> button (rotate and NOTE
not been activated. push to select)
For device details, see your audio/mobile
Your mobile phone has not been paired with the BLUETOOTH settings phone Owners Manual.
Bluetooth system of the audio unit.
Enter the phone setup menu via the (phone) For assistance with the Bluetooth audio/
The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth button, select the [Bluetooth] key, and then check if mobile phone integration, please visit your lo-
technology (BT Core v2.0). the bluetooth is set to on (default setting is on, push cal NISSAN dealer.
the <ENTER> button if not).

4-40 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be [Scan devices]: [Pair device]:
paired with the system. 1) Press the button. Select [Scan device] Turn the audio unit Bluetooth on. See [Bluetooth]
To set up the Bluetooth system with a device the The audio unit searches bluetooth devices and description.
following items are available: shows all visible devices.
Use the audio unit to pair:
Pressing the button cancels the search. Press the button. Select the [Pair device]
key. The Audio unit will wait for a connection
2) Select the device to be paired.
request from the mobile device.
Use the <MENU> dial and press to select.
The pairing procedure depends on the Bluetooth
3) The pairing procedure depends on the device to device:
be connected:
[Scan device] 1) Device without PIN code:
1) Device without PIN code:
Shows all available visible Bluetooth devices and The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
initializes Bluetooth connection from the audio The Bluetooth connection will be automati- cally connected without any further input.
unit. cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code:
[Pair device] 2) Device with PIN code: Two different ways of pairing are possible
Two different ways of pairing are possible depending on the device, see under [Scan
Initializes Bluetooth connection from the mobile
depending on the device: device] for a description.
device.
[Sel. device]
Type A: Use the Bluetooth audio/mobile phone device
The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000 to pair:
Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be and a count down timer will be displayed.
1) Switch ON the Bluetooth devices search
selected for connection. Confirm the PIN code on the device.
mode on the mobile device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.
[Del. device] If the search mode finds the audio unit it will
If the count down timer reaches 0 the at- be shown on the device display.
A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted.
tempt to pair the devices will be cancelled.
2) Select the audio unit shown as [My Car].
[Bluetooth]
Type B:
3) Enter the number code shown on the rel-
If this setting is turned off, the connection be- The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
evant device with the devices own keypad,
tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle password] together with a 6 digit code
and press the confirmation key on the device
Bluetooth module will be cancelled. will be displayed. The unique and identi-
itself.
cal code should be displayed on the de-
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth device own-
vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
ers manual for further details.
device.
The Bluetooth connection will be made.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-41
[Sel. device]: [#123]
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth au- Use this item to enter numbers during a call. For
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or example, if directed by an automated phone sys-
registered with the Bluetooth audio system. If the tem to dial an extension number the system will
list contains devices then select the appropriate de- send the tone associated with the selected num-
vice to connect to the Bluetooth audio system. ber.

The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the 2. Put a call on hold:
capability of the registered device: Receiving a call Rotate the <MENU> dial until is highlighted,
press <ENTER>. The call is on hold. Pressing
: Mobile phone integration When receiving an incoming call, the display will
show the callers phone number (or a notification <ENTER> accepts the call, rotate the <MENU> dial
: Audio streaming (A2DP Advanced Audio message that the callers phone number cannot be clockwise and press <ENTER> to reject.
Distribution Profile) shown) and three operation icons. 3. Rejecting a call:
[Del. device]: 1. Answering and during a call: Rotate the <MENU> dial until is highlighted,
A registered device can be removed from the Blue- Answer the call by pressing <ENTER> (the is press <ENTER>. The call is rejected.
tooth audio system. Select a registered device then highlighted).
press <ENTER> to confirm the deletion.
By pressing <ENTER>, you can select the following
[Bluetooth]: options:
If Bluetooth has been switched off a notification
message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue- Ending the call by selecting and press
tooth] from the phone menu (press ). To switch
<ENTER>. Initiating a call
the Bluetooth signal on, press <ENTER> and a Put the call on hold by selecting and press A call can be initiated using one of the following
follow up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and <ENTER>. methods:
press <ENTER> to display the Bluetooth settings
menu screen.
[ ] Making a call from the phone book
Use this item (the transfer handset command) to
Manually dialing a phone number
HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE transfer the call from the audio system to your
CONTROL mobile phone. Redialing
To transfer the call back to hands-free via the
The hands-free mode can be operated using the audio system select [ ].
telephone button on the audio system, or the
and (where fitted) on the steering wheel.

4-42 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Using call history (Call List menu) If the contact has more numbers assigned for
(home), (mobile), or (office), scroll,
Dialled
and select the appropriate number to dial.
Received
Missed
Making a call from the phone book:
Once the Bluetooth connection has been made,
between the registered mobile phone and the audio Alternatively, the quick search mode can be used as
system, phone book data will be transferred auto- follows: Manually dialling a phone number:
matically to the audio system. The transfer may take
1. While in the phonebook screen press <A-Z/
a while before completion.
j
6 >. WARNING
NOTE 2. Turn the <MENU> dial for the first alphabetic or Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the
Phone book data will be erased when: numerical letter of the contact name. Once high- parking brake before making a call.
lighted, press <ENTER> to select the letter. To dial a phone number manually use the audio sys-
Switching to another registered mobile
tem display (virtual keyboard pad) as follows:
phone. 3. The display will show the corresponding contact
name(s). Where necessary, use the <MENU> 1. Press , and turn the <MENU> dial to high-
Mobile phone is disconnected.
dial again to scroll further for the appropriate light [Call Number].
The registered mobile phone is deleted from contact name to call.
2. Press <ENTER> to select [Call Number].
the audio system.
4. A following screen will show the number to be
1. Press < >. dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial 3. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll along, and select
the number. each number of the phone number. Once high-
2. Turn the <MENU> dial and scroll down to [Phone lighted, press <ENTER> after each number se-
Book] then press <ENTER>. lection.
3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropri- To delete the last number entered scroll to the
ate contact name (highlighted), and press [] (Backspace) symbol, and once highlighted
<ENTER>. press <ENTER>. The last number will be de-
4. A following screen will show the number to be leted. Pressing <ENTER> repeatedly will delete
dialled. If correct, press <ENTER> again to dial each subsequent number.
the number.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-43
4. After entering the last number, scroll to the [Volume]
symbol, and press <ENTER> to dial the
[Ring]
number.
Set the phone ringing volume
Redial:
[Call]
To redial or call the last number dialled, press Set the volume of the conversation during a
for more than 2 seconds. call.
Second incoming call
[Ringtone]
Whenever there is a second incoming call is shown
[Car]
in the display. By selecting the icon the call is
Choose the in car ringtone.
accepted and the current call is put on hold.
Selecting by rotating <MENU> and pressing [Phone]
Using call history (Call List menu): Choose the phone ringtone.
<ENTER> rejects the second incoming call. When
A number from the dialled, received, or missed call this is done during the conversation it ends the call.
lists can also be used to make a call. Selecting the key using the <MENU> dial and [PB download]
Download the phonebook of the mobile device
pressing <ENTER> switches between the phone
[Dialed]
conversations.
to the audio unit manually.
Use the dialled call mode to make a call which is (For the other selections, see Making a call from the STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES
based on the list of outgoing (dialled) calls. phone book earlier) (where fitted)
[Received]
Use the received call mode to make a call which
is based on the list of received calls.
[Missed]
Use the missed call mode to make a call which General settings
is based on the list of missed calls. From the phone menu select [Settings]
Volume settings and manually downloading the
1. Press , and select [Call List].
phonebook can be done using this menu.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll to an item, and Menu operation: NAA1436
press <ENTER> to select it. Press <ENTER> to select, rotate the <MENU> dial
to increase or decrease the volume.
3. Scroll to the preferred phone number then press
Press <ENTER> to confirm.
j
1 Volume down button
<ENTER>, or press to dial the number.
Menu items: j
2 Volume up button

4-44 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

j
3 Phone button When installing large capacity wireless equipment
or a car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe
j
4 Phone end/reject button
the following as it may adversely affect the Engine
The hands-free mode can be operated using the control system and other electronic parts depend-
steering wheel switches. ing on its installation location.
Volume down button CAUTION
Press the volume down button to decrease the vol- Keep the antenna as far as possible away from
ume of the speakers. the Electric Control Module.
Volume up button Also keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm
(8 inches) away from the Electro Injection har-
Press the volume up button to increase the volume ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to
of the speakers. any harness.
Phone button Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as rec-
The phone button allows you to: ommended by the manufacturer.

Accept an incoming call by pressing once. Connect the ground wire from the radio chas-
sis to the body.
Redial the last outgoing call by pressing the for
more than 2 seconds. NOTE

Phone END button For further information, visit the NISSAN web site:
www.nissan-europe.com. Select your country
Reject an incoming call by pressing during from the list and go to the SERVICES menu. If
an incoming call. not available on the web site, contact a NISSAN
End an active call by pressing once. dealer or qualified workshop.

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-45
5 Starting and driving

Running-in schedule ................................................ 5-2 Precautions on push-button ignition switch


Before starting the engine ........................................ 5-2 operation ............................................................ 5-12
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-3 Intelligent Key system ......................................... 5-12
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) ......................... 5-3 Ignition switch positions...................................... 5-13
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)................ 5-4 Emergency engine shut off.................................. 5-14
Meter information................................................ 5-7 Steering lock ...................................................... 5-14
Activation............................................................ 5-7 Intelligent Key battery discharge.......................... 5-14
TPMS sensor ID and position recognition ........... 5-7 Starting engine ........................................................ 5-15
Adjusting TPMS target pressure ......................... 5-8 Models with Intelligent Key system...................... 5-15
Tyre pressure units ............................................. 5-8 Models without Intelligent Key system ................. 5-16
[Check cold tyre] message ................................. 5-8 Driving the vehicle.................................................... 5-17
TPMS temperature calibration............................. 5-8 Driving with manual transmission......................... 5-17
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ......... 5-9 Driving with XTRONIC Transmission (CVT) ........ 5-18
Three-way catalyst (Petrol engine models)................ 5-9 Stop/Start System (where fitted) .............................. 5-22
To help prevent damage ..................................... 5-9 Normal operation ................................................ 5-22
Turbocharger system (Diesel engine models) ........... 5-10 Precautions ........................................................ 5-24
Care when driving ................................................... 5-10 Stop/Start System OFF switch ........................... 5-25
Engine cold start period ...................................... 5-10 Environmental savings ........................................ 5-25
Loading luggage................................................. 5-10 Four-wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)..................... 5-26
Driving on wet roads........................................... 5-10 4WD mode operations........................................ 5-27
Driving under winter conditions ........................... 5-10 4WD shift tips .................................................... 5-27
Ignition switch (where fitted) .................................... 5-11 4WD Mode indicator lights ................................. 5-28
Manual transmission ........................................... 5-11 Driving four-wheel drive (4WD) safely ................. 5-28
XTRONIC transmission (CVT) ............................ 5-11 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (where fitted)..... 5-30
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-11 BSW system operation ....................................... 5-30
Key positions ...................................................... 5-11 BSW driving situations ....................................... 5-32
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (where BSW temporary disabled status.......................... 5-32
fitted).................................................................. 5-12 BSW automatic deactivation ............................... 5-33
Push-button ignition switch (where fitted) ................. 5-12 BSW malfunction ............................................... 5-33
BSW camera unit maintenance........................... 5-33
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (where Installation of coupling device (except for
fitted)....................................................................... 5-33 Australia) ............................................................ 5-56
LDW system operation ....................................... 5-34 Vehicle security........................................................ 5-57
LDW temporary disabled status .......................... 5-35 Electric power steering system ................................ 5-57
LDW automatic deactivation ............................... 5-35 Brake system........................................................... 5-58
LDW malfunction................................................ 5-35 Brake precautions .............................................. 5-58
Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance ............... 5-35 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)............................... 5-59
Cruise control (where fitted) .................................... 5-36 Using system ...................................................... 5-59
Precautions on cruise control.............................. 5-36 Self-test feature .................................................. 5-59
Cruise control system operations ........................ 5-37 Normal operation ................................................ 5-60
Speed limiter (where fitted) ...................................... 5-38 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
Speed limiter operations ..................................... 5-39 (where fitted) ........................................................... 5-60
Forward emergency braking system (where fitted) ... 5-40 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
System operation................................................ 5-41 switch................................................................. 5-61
Parking .................................................................... 5-43 Chassis control........................................................ 5-62
Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where fitted)................. 5-45 Active trace control............................................. 5-62
Operation ........................................................... 5-45 Active engine brake (for XTRONIC (CVT)
Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fitted) ............ 5-46 models only) ....................................................... 5-63
Deactivation of the IPA system............................ 5-47 Active ride control............................................... 5-64
Parking procedure using the IPA system............. 5-48 Hill Start Assist (HSA) system.................................. 5-64
Operating tips..................................................... 5-52 ECO mode system (where fitted) ............................. 5-65
Trailer towing........................................................... 5-54 Cold weather driving................................................ 5-66
Operating precautions ........................................ 5-54 Battery ............................................................... 5-66
Maximum load limits (for Australia) ...................... 5-55 Engine coolant.................................................... 5-66
Tyre pressure ..................................................... 5-55 Tyre equipment................................................... 5-66
Safety chains ...................................................... 5-55 Special winter equipment.................................... 5-67
Trailer brakes...................................................... 5-55 Corrosion protection........................................... 5-67
Trailer detection (where fitted) ............................ 5-56
RUNNING-IN SCHEDULE BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles), follow these


WARNING
Check the operation of the warning/indicator
recommendations for the future reliability and lights when the ignition switch is turned to the
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow the The driving characteristics of your vehicle can be ON position.
recommendations may result in shortened engine changed remarkably by any additional load and
life and reduced engine performance. its distribution as well as by adding optional
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the dash-
board or rear parcel shelf in order to prevent
equipment (trailer couplings, roof racks, etc.).
Avoid driving for long periods at a constant
Your driving style and speed have to be adjusted
injury in the event of a sudden stop.
speed, either fast or slow.
accordingly. Especially when carrying heavy
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. loads, your speed must be reduced adequately.
Avoid quick starts. Make sure the area around the vehicle is free of
Avoid hard braking as much as possible. obstacles.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant,
miles). brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid
as frequently as possible, at least whenever you
NOTE refuel.
Models with K9K diesel engine will achieve top Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and
performance only after approximately 5,000 km condition. Also check the tyre pressure for
(3,000 miles). proper inflation.
Maintenance items in the 8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself section should be checked peri-
odically.
Check that all windows and light lenses are
clean.
Check that all doors are closed.
Position the seat and adjust the head restraints.
Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to
do likewise.

5-2 Starting and driving


PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter- The exhaust system and body should be in-
ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
Do not leave children or adults who would open and have the vehicle inspected immedi- shop whenever:
normally require the support of others alone ately.
the vehicle is raised for service.
in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left
alone. They could accidentally injure them-
Do not run the engine in closed spaces, such
you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
as a garage, for any longer than is absolutely
selves or others through inadvertent opera- ing into the passenger compartment.
necessary.
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, you notice a change in the sound of the
temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-
exhaust system.
become high enough to cause severe or pos- ning for any extended length of time.
sibly fatal injuries to people or animals. you have had an accident involving dam-
Keep the back door closed while driving, oth-
age to the exhaust system, underbody, or
To prevent luggage or packages from sliding erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must drive in
rear of the vehicle.
forward during braking, do not stack anything
in the cargo area higher than the seatbacks. this way for some reason, take the following
steps:
Secure all cargo with ropes or straps to pre-
1) Open all the windows.
vent it from sliding or shifting.
Failure to follow proper seating instructions 2) Set the air recirculation mode (
OFF position.
) to the
see Seats in the 1. Safety Seats, Seat
belts and Supplemental Restraint System 3) Set the fan speed control to the maximum
section, could result in serious personal injury position to circulate the air.
in an accident or sudden stop.
If electrical wiring or other cable connections
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide) must pass to a trailer through the seal of the
body, follow the manufacturers recommen-
WARNING dations to prevent carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colourless and odourless carbon monoxide. When a vehicle has been stopped in an open
Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas and can area with its engine running for any significant
cause unconsciousness or death. length of time, turn the fan on to force outside
air into the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-3


TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)

TPMS sensor j A has a registered wheel location


and sends pressure and temperature data via radio
to a receiver inside the vehicle.
Each tyre, including the spare (where fitted), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac-
NIC2222 ard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should deter- NIC2225
mine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those
tyres.)
j
a TPMS indicator light Accordingly, when the TPMS indicator light illumi-
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) con- nates, safely stop the vehicle to check the tyres as
j
b TPMS tyre location indicator trols the TPMS indicator light j a , which will illumi- soon as possible and inflate the tyres to the proper
nate when one or more tyres are significantly under- pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
inflated. A warning and tyre location indicator j b tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre
will also appear in the vehicle information display to failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
identify the tyre or tyres with low pressure. and tyre tread life which may affect the vehicles
handling and stopping ability.
NOTE
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre main-
tenance. It is the drivers responsibility to main-
NCE373 tain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger the illumina-
tion of the TPMS indicator light ja.
j
A Tyre valve with sensor
The TPMS indicator light flashes for a short period
The tyre pressure monitoring system monitors the
NIC2223 and then turns on continuously if the system is not
tyre pressure of the four wheels while the vehicle is
operating properly. This sequence will continue
in motion. Following a loss in pressure, the system
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
will warn the driver using a visual warning. Each If you now press the <ENTER> switch on the steer-
malfunction exists (missing or faulty TPMS sensor
ing wheel, a further screen is displayed to tell you
or TPMS system malfunction). When the malfunc-
the tyre pressure of all four tyres.
tion warning light is illuminated, the system may not

5-4 Starting and driving


be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as
WARNING
Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a vari- fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
ety of reasons including the installation of replace- If the TPMS indicator light illuminates while tion of the TPMS.
ment or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that driving:
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tyre Repair
avoid sudden steering manoeuvres Sealant or equivalent can be used for tempo-
check the TPMS indicator light after replacing one
rarily repairing a tyre. Do not inject any other
or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure avoid abrupt braking tyre liquid or aerosol tyre sealant into the
that the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels
reduce vehicle speed tyres, as this may cause a malfunction of the
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
tyre pressure sensors.
pull off the road to a safe location
The TPMS does not monitor the tyre pressure of
NISSAN recommends using only Genuine
the spare tyre. stop the vehicle as soon as possible NISSAN Emergency Tyre Sealant provided
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is Driving with under-inflated tyres may perma- with your vehicle. Other tyre sealants may
driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). Also, nently damage the tyres and increase the like- damage the valve stem seal which can cause
this system may not detect a sudden drop in tyre lihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage the tyre to lose air pressure. Visit a NISSAN
pressure (for example a flat tyre while driving). could occur which may lead to an accident dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
and could result in serious personal injury. sible after using tyre repair sealant (for mod-
The TPMS indicator light may not automatically
els equipped with the emergency tyre punc-
turn off when the tyre pressure is adjusted. After Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Ad-
ture repair kit).
the tyre is inflated to the recommended COLD just the tyre pressure to the recommended
tyre pressure, drive the vehicle at speeds above COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre plac- CAUTION
25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate the TPMS. See ard to turn the TPMS indicator light OFF. In
TPMS sensor ID and position recognition later case of a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre
The TPMS may not function properly when the
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the
in this section as soon as possible. (See Flat tyre in the wheels are buried in snow.
6. In case of emergency section for chang-
Following a change in the outside temperature,
ing a flat tyre.) Do not place metalised film or any metal parts
the TPMS indicator light may illuminate even if
(antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may
the tyre pressure has been adjusted properly. When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
cause poor reception of the signals from the
Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not
COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are TPMS indicator light will flash for approxi-
function properly.
cold, and reset the TPMS. mately 1 minute. The light will remain on after
For additional information, see [Check cold tyre] 1 minute. Be sure to follow all instructions for
message later in this section. wheel replacement and mount the TPMS sys-
tem correctly.

Starting and driving 5-5


Some devices and transmitters may tempo- Fit the valve caps properly. Without the valve
rarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS caps the valve and tyre pressure monitor sen-
and cause the TPMS indicator light to illumi- sors could be damaged.
nate. Some examples are:
Do not damage the valves and sensors when
Facilities or electric devices using similar storing the wheels or fitting different tyres.
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
Replace the sensor grommet and washer dur-
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is ing a tyre change. Once they have been re-
being used in or near the vehicle. moved, the sensor grommet and washer can-
not be reused and must be replaced. The
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
TPMS sensors can be used again.
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle. Use caution when using tyre inflation equip-
ment with a rigid air supply tube, as leverage
If devices which transmit electrical noise
applied by the long nozzle can damage the
are connected to the vehicles 12V power
valve stem.
supply.
When inflating the tyres and checking the tyre
pressure, never bend the valves.
Special aluminium valves are fitted to mount
the TPMS sensors on the wheels. The TPMS
sensor is fixed at the wheels by a nut. The nut
needs to be correctly fitted at a torque setting
of 7.5 0.5 Nm. If the TPMS sensor is tight-
ened exceeding the limit, there is a possibility
the sensor grommet will be damaged. If the
sensor is tightened under the limit, there is a
possibility of causing an air leak.
Use Genuine NISSAN valve caps that comply
with the factory-fitted valve cap specifications.
Do not use metal valve caps.

5-6 Starting and driving


METER INFORMATION ACTIVATION
TPMS indicator light(s) Possible cause Recommended action
At ignition ON. Once the vehicle starts moving the
tyre pressure is monitored.
TPMS SENSOR ID AND POSITION

m
Low tyre pressure Inflate tyre(s) to the correct pressure RECOGNITION
It is recommended that a NISSAN dealer performs
the registration of a new TPMS sensor or sensor
Check if the TPMS sensors are location.
Genuine NISSAN TPMS sensor is not present.
detected at one or more wheels If no sensor is present add a genuine It is also possible to register the sensor yourself fol-
NISSAN TPMS sensor lowing the procedure below:
TPMS radio communication interfer-

m
Procedure:
ence between TPMS wheel sensor Drive away from the area of interfer-
and TPMS receiver due to external ence 1. Change tyre position or have new TPMS sensor
sources. fitted.
If the problem persists contact a 2. Park with Ignition ON or Engine ON for more
TPMS parts malfunction
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop than 20 minutes. You must perform this step be-
fore driving.
3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes between 25
km/h (16 MPH) and 100 km/h (64 MPH). The
TPMS sensor ID and position will automatically
be detected.
NOTE
The TPMS might not synchronise if one or more
of the following conditions apply:
Bad road conditions
The TPMS unit does not receive correct data
from tyre pressure sensors
Driving below 25 km/h (16 MPH)

Starting and driving 5-7


Driving above 100 km/h (64 MPH) wheel switches to select the [Settings] menu, fol- NOTE
lowed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select [Target front] and
High acceleration
[Target rear] and set the desired tyre pressure.
Even if the pressure is above the preset target
pressure, the yellow colour in the tyre pressure
High deceleration
The TPMS target pressures will be displayed in the warning means that the tyre pressure is actually
In stop and go traffic or traffic waves centre of the front and rear axle on the TPMS screen too low. Tyre pressure is increasing during driv-
of the vehicle information display. ing. Check the tyre pressure when the tyre is
ADJUSTING TPMS TARGET cold.
PRESSURE TYRE PRESSURE UNITS
The units displayed by the TPMS system can be
TPMS TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
selected using the vehicle information display. Se- The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of
lect the [Settings] menu, followed by [Tyre Pres- the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the
sures]. Select [Tyre pressure unit] and choose the car is driven. To be able to accurately monitor the
unit that you want. tyre air leakage and to prevent false TPMS warnings
due to reductions in temperature, the TPMS system
[CHECK COLD TYRE] MESSAGE uses temperature sensors in the tyres to perform
temperature compensation calculations.
On rare occasions it may be necessary to recalibrate
NIC2227 the TPMS system reference temperature using the
vehicle information display. See Settings in the
j
A Tyre pressure 2. Instruments and controls section. This opera-
tion should only be performed when the actual tyre
j
B Tyre pressure units pressure has been adjusted, whilst the current am-
j
C Front target pressure bient temperature is significantly different to the cur-
rent calibration temperature.
j
D Rear target pressure NIC2224
To initiate TPMS temperature calibration use the
If you are using your vehicle in a heavily laden condi- steering wheel switches to select the [Settings]
tion, the tyre pressures should be inflated to the If the tyre pressure becomes higher than the target menu, followed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select [Cali-
Laden Pressure shown on the tyre placard. pressure during a low tyre pressure condition, the brate] followed by [Start]. While the calibration pro-
The TPMS system can be adjusted in the vehicle [Check Cold Tyre] message will be displayed in the cess is active, the message: [Resetting tyre pres-
information display to set the target pressure to the vehicle information display (see Settings in the sure system] will be displayed in the vehicle informa-
Laden Pressure shown on the tyre placard. See 2. Instruments and controls section). tion display.
Settings in the 2. Instruments and controls sec-
tion. To adjust the target pressure use the steering

5-8 Starting and driving


ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD THREE-WAY CATALYST (Petrol
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS engine models)

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover NISSAN Blue Citizenship Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in
rate than other types of vehicles. the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys-
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device
tems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the
They have higher ground clearance than passenger installed in the exhaust system. In the converter,
converter, causing it to overheat.
cars to make them capable of performing in a wide exhaust gases are burned at high temperatures to
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. help reduce pollutants. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level.
This gives them a higher centre of gravity than ordi- Running out of fuel could cause the engine to
CAUTION
nary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
is a better view of the road, allowing you to antici- The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are
Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or
pate problems. However, they are not designed for very hot. While the engine is running, keep
if noticeable loss of performance or other un-
cornering at the same speeds as conventional two- people or flammable materials away from the
usual operating conditions are detected. Have
wheel drive (2WD) vehicles any more than low-slung exhaust pipe.
the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. If possible, avoid sharp
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- dealer or qualified workshop.
mable materials such as dry grass, waste pa-
turns or abrupt manoeuvres, particularly at high per or rags, as they may burn easily. Do not race the engine while warming it up.
speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of When parking, ensure that people or flam- Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the
engine.
control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover accident an mable materials are kept away from the ex-
unbelted person is significantly more likely to be haust pipe.
injured than a person who is wearing a seat belt.
TO HELP PREVENT DAMAGE
CAUTION
Use UNLEADED PETROL ONLY, specifically
the recommended type. For details, see Ca-
pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in
the 9. Technical information section.
Do not use leaded petrol. Leaded petrol will
seriously damage three-way catalyst.
Deposits from leaded petrol will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalysts ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.

Starting and driving 5-9


TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM CARE WHEN DRIVING
(Diesel engine models)

The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubrica- Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es- DRIVING UNDER WINTER
tion and cooling of its rotating components. The tur- sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you CONDITIONS
bocharger turbine turns at extremely high speeds should be the one who knows best how to drive in
and it can reach an extremely high temperature. It is the given circumstances. Drive safely.
essential to maintain a flow of clean oil through the Avoid starting off, accelerating or stopping sud-
turbocharger system. A sudden interruption to the ENGINE COLD START PERIOD
denly.
oil supply may cause a malfunction in the turbo- Due to the higher engine speeds when the engine is
charger. cold, extra caution must be exercised when select- Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

To ensure prolonged life and performance of the


ing a gear during the engine warm-up period after Avoid sudden steering actions.
starting the engine.
turbocharger, it is essential to comply with the fol-
lowing maintenance procedure:
Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in
LOADING LUGGAGE front.
CAUTION Loads, their distribution and the attachment of equip-
ment (coupling devices, roof luggage carriers, etc.)
Change the engine oil of the turbo-charged
will change the driving characteristics of the vehicle
diesel engine as prescribed. See the sepa-
rately provided Warranty Information & Main- considerably. Driving style and speed must be ad-
tenance Booklet for additional information. justed accordingly.

Use only the recommended engine oil. See DRIVING ON WET ROADS
Capacities and recommended fuel/ Avoid starting off, accelerating and stopping sud-
lubricants in the 9. Technical information denly.
section.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
If the engine has been operating at high rpm
for an extended period of time, let it idle for a Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle in
few minutes prior to shutdown. front.

Do not accelerate the engine to high rpm im- When water covers the road surface in puddles,
mediately after starting it. small streams, etc, REDUCE SPEED to prevent
aquaplaning which will cause skidding and loss
of control. Worn tyres increase this risk.

5-10 Starting and driving


IGNITION SWITCH (where fitted)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION When the key cannot be turned toward the LOCK
position, proceed as follows to remove the key:
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the key from the 1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
ignition switch, then turn the steering clockwise. To 2. Turn the key slightly in the ON direction.
unlock the steering wheel, insert the ignition key and
turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly 3. Turn the key towards the LOCK position.
right and left. 4. Remove the key.
The ignition key can only be removed when the STEERING LOCK
switch is in the LOCK position (Normal parking po-
NSD477
sition) (0). To lock the steering wheel
XTRONIC TRANSMISSION (CVT) 1. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
j
1 OFF
The ignition lock is designed so that the key cannot 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
WARNING be turned to LOCK and removed until the shift lever 3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn clockwise
is moved to the P (Park) position. from the straight up position.
Never remove the key or turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position while driving. The steering When removing the key from the LOCK position of
To unlock the steering wheel
wheel will lock and could cause the driver to lose the ignition switch, make sure that the shift lever is
control of the vehicle. This could result in serious in the P (Park) position. 1. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
vehicle damage or personal injury. The shift lever can only be moved from the P (Park) 2. Gently turn the key while rotating the steering
CAUTION position when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- wheel slightly right and left.
tion and the footbrake pedal is depressed.
Use electrical accessories with the engine run- KEY POSITIONS
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. If To remove the key from the ignition switch:
you must use accessories while the engine is not
LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
running, do not use them for extended periods of The ignition key can only be removed when in this
time and do not use multiple electrical accesso- 2. Turn the key to the LOCK position. position.
ries at the same time. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. The steering lock can only be locked in this position.
The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock de- If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the
vice.
OFF/ACC (Accessories)/(1)
shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion. The engine is turned off without locking the steering
wheel. This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

Starting and driving 5-11


PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH (where fitted)

ON (Normal operating position) (2) PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION driver, the vehicle may not start.
This position turns on the ignition system and elec-
trical accessories. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the igni-
WARNING tion switch cannot be switched from the
START (3) LOCK position, and if the steering lock is
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch
The engine starter activates and the engine will start. engaged, the steering wheel cannot be
while driving the vehicle except in an emergency.
As soon as the engine has started, release the key moved. Charge the battery as soon as pos-
(The engine will stop when the ignition switch is
immediately. It will return to the ON position. sible (See Jump-starting in the 6. In case of
pushed 3 consecutive times in quick succession
emergency section.)
NOTE or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the Operating range
For vehicles fitted with Stop/Start System: vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash
When the engine is automatically stopped by the and serious injury.
Stop/Start System the ignition switch can still be Before operating the push-button ignition switch:
operated as usual.
At the end of a journey turn the ignition OFF to
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position or
depress the clutch pedal (for Manual Transmis-
avoid a flat battery. The Stop/Start System does sion (MT) models).
not automatically turn ignition off.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models).
(where fitted) INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM SSD0436Z

The NISSAN Anti Theft System (NATS)* will stop


The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition
the engine if someone tries to start the engine with- The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the
switch without taking the key out from your pocket
out using the registered NATS key. engine when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-
or bag. The operating environment and/or condi-
* Immobilizer tions may affect the Intelligent Key system opera- fied operating range j1 as illustrated.
tion. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
If you failed to start the engine using the NATS Key,
turn the ignition knob to the LOCK position, wait for CAUTION discharged or strong radio waves are present near
5 seconds and turn the key to the START position the operating location, the Intelligent Key systems
again to start the engine. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you operating range becomes narrower and may not
when operating the vehicle. function properly.
For additional information, see NISSAN Anti-Theft
System (NATS) in the 3. Pre-driving checks and Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve- If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it
hicle when you leave the vehicle.
adjustments section.

5-12 Starting and driving


is possible for anyone, even someone who does not Two times to change to OFF. Use electrical accessories with the engine
carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch running to avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
to start the engine. tery. If you must use accessories while the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
engine is not running, do not use them for
The luggage room area is not included in the closed with the switch in the OFF position.
extended periods of time and do not use mul-
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may func-
Some indicators and warnings for operation are dis- tiple electrical accessories at the same time.
tion.
played on the vehicle information display. See Ve-
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument hicle information display in the Instruments and LOCK position (normal parking position)
panel, inside the glove box, door pocket or the controls section of this manual. The ignition switch and steering lock can only be
corner of the interior compartment, the Intelli- locked at this position.
gent Key may not function. ON position (normal operating position)
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened
This position turns on the ignition system and elec-
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or
trical accessories.
or closed with the ignition switched off.
window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key
XTRONIC transmission:
may function. ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the igni-
tion switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle is not The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS running, after some time under the following condi- switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position
tions: until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When pushing the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
All doors are closed tion, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-
Shift lever is in P (Park) (for XTRONIC transmis- tion.
sion models). When the ignition switch cannot be switched to the
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of LOCK position:
the following occur: 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Any door is opened. 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch po-
NSD476
Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position. sition will change to the ON position.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depress-


Ignition switch changes position. 3. Push the ignition switch again to the LOCK posi-
tion.
ing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illumi- CAUTION
The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
nate: Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods
tion if the ignition switch is in the ON position and
Push the centre of the ignition switch: of time when the ignition switch is in the ACC
the brake pedal is depressed.
or ON position and the engine is not run-
Once to change to ON. ning. This can discharge the battery.

Starting and driving 5-13


If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push- To lock steering wheel INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
button ignition switch cannot be moved from the DISCHARGE
LOCK position. 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position
where the ignition switch position indicator will
OFF position not illuminate.
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the 2. Open or close the door. The ignition switch turns
engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No to the LOCK position.
lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the right
ACC position or left from the straight up position.
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelli- To unlock steering wheel
gent key with you and the ignition placed from ON
Push the ignition switch to ACC, and the steering
to OFF, the radio can still be used for a period of SSD0860Z
wheel will be automatically unlocked.
time, or until the drivers door is opened.
CAUTION If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navi-
gation, and Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the environmental conditions interfere with the Intelli-
may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/ push-button ignition switch cannot be gent Key operation, start the engine according to
VOLUME control knob (See Monitor, climate, au- switched from the LOCK position. the following procedure:
dio, phone and voice recognition systems in this
manual) or the keyfob unlock button up to a total of If the ignition switch position does not change 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) (XTRONIC
from the LOCK position, push the ignition transmission models) or N (Neutral) (MT models)
30 minutes. position.
switch again while rotating the steering wheel
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF slightly to the right and left. 2. Firmly apply the footbrake.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor (MT mod-
while driving, perform the following procedure: els)
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 4. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch 5. Push the ignition switch while depressing the
for more than 2 seconds. brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime
STEERING LOCK sounds. The engine will start.

The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft


steering lock device.

5-14 Starting and driving


STARTING ENGINE

After step 4 is performed, when the ignition switch MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY ing the brake pedal or clutch pedal with
is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the SYSTEM the ignition switch in any position.
ignition switch position will change to ACC.
1. Apply the parking brake. For additional informa- For diesel engine models: In cold condi-
NOTE tion, see Parking brake switch in the 3. Pre- tions there may be a delay for a few sec-
driving checks and adjustments section. onds before the engine cranks. This is due
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
to the glow plugs heating to ensure ad-
ACC or ON position or the engine is started 2. Manual transmission models: equate engine starting conditions. The
by the above procedures, the Intelligent Key
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position, glow indicator light ( ) will illuminate
system warning light may blink in yellow (on during this delay, then the engine will start.
the meter) even if the Intelligent Key is inside and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while
the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To stop starting the engine. 4. Immediately release the ignition switch when the
the warning light from blinking, touch the ig- XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models: engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,
nition switch with the Intelligent Key again. repeat the above procedures.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
If the Intelligent Key system warning light in position. (P position is preferred). NOTE
the meter is blinking in green, replace the bat- Petrol engine models:
tery as soon as possible. (See Integrated The starter is designed to operate only when
keyfob/Intelligent Key battery replacement in the shift lever is in the proper position. If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
the 8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself sec- The Intelligent Key (where fitted) must be car- tremely cold weather or when restarting,
tion.) ried while inside the vehicle when operating depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
the ignition switch. proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor)
and hold it and then crank the engine. Re-
3. To start the engine: lease the ignition switch and the accelera-
MT models keep the clutch pedal tor pedal when the engine starts.
depressed and/or depress the brake pedal If the engine is very hard to start because
then push the ignition switch to the ON po- it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal
sition. all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank
XTRONIC transmission models depress the the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
brake pedal then push the ignition switch to
the ON position. Crank the engine with your foot off the ac-
celerator pedal by turning the ignition
NOTE switch to START. Release the switch when
To start the engine immediately, push and the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
release the ignition switch while depress- fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

Starting and driving 5-15


CAUTION 7. The steering wheel lock engages when ignition NOTE
is off and a door is opened or closed.
As soon as the engine has started, release Petrol engine models:
the ignition switch immediately. MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
Do not operate the starter for more than KEY SYSTEM tremely cold weather or when restarting,
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does 1. Apply the parking brake. For additional informa- depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
not start, turn the ignition switch to the tion, see Parking brake switch in the 3. Pre- proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor)
OFF position and wait 10 seconds (Petrol driving checks and adjustments section. and hold it and then crank the engine. Re-
engine models) or 20 seconds (Diesel en- lease the ignition switch and the accelera-
gine models) before cranking again, oth- 2. Manual transmission models: tor pedal when the engine starts.
erwise the starter could be damaged. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position,
and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while
If the engine is very hard to start because
If it becomes necessary to start the engine
starting the engine.
it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal
with a booster battery and jumper cables, all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank
the instructions and cautions contained in XTRONIC transmission (CVT) models: the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking
the 6. In case of emergency section the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
should be carefully followed. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) Crank the engine with your foot off the ac-
position. (P position is preferred). celerator pedal by turning the ignition
5. After starting, allow the engine to idle for at least
The starter is designed to operate only when switch to START. Release the switch when
30 seconds to warm-up. Drive at moderate
the shift lever is in the proper position. the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
speeds for a short distance first, especially in
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
cold weather. 3. Rotate the steering wheel left to right to release
the ignition lock whilst turning the ignition switch CAUTION
CAUTION
to the ON position.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the As soon as the engine has started, release
4. For diesel engine models: Wait until the glow the ignition switch immediately.
engine is warming up.
indicator light ( ) goes out.
6. To stop the engine: Do not operate the starter for more than
5. With your foot on the brake pedal, not on the 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
Manual transmission models: apply the park- accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning not start, turn the ignition switch to the
ing brake and push the ignition switch to the the ignition switch to START. OFF position and wait 10 seconds (Petrol
OFF position. engine models) or 20 seconds (Diesel en-
6. Immediately release the ignition switch when the gine models) before cranking again, oth-
XTRONIC transmission models: move the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, erwise the starter could be damaged.
shift lever to the P (Park) position, apply the repeat the above procedures.
parking brake and push the switch to the
OFF position.

5-16 Starting and driving


DRIVING THE VEHICLE

If it becomes necessary to start the engine DRIVING WITH MANUAL


with a booster battery and jumper cables, TRANSMISSION
the instructions and cautions contained in
the 6. In case of emergency section CAUTION
should be carefully followed. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
7. After starting, allow the engine to idle for at least driving. This may cause clutch damage.
30 seconds to warm-up. Drive at moderate Stop your vehicle completely before shifting
speeds for a short distance first, especially in into the R (Reverse) position.
cold weather.
CAUTION
When you are shifting from one gear to an-
NSD525
other, be certain to depress the clutch pedal
6speed MT (where fitted)
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the all the way to the floor to avoid clashing or
engine is warming up. chipping the gears. Shifting
8. To stop the engine: Avoid abrupt starts and acceleration for your j
A RHD models
safety.
Manual transmission models: apply the park- j
B LHD models
ing brake and push or turn the ignition switch When quick acceleration is required for some
j
1 Shift lever ring
to the OFF position. reason, shift to a lower gear and accelerate
until the vehicle reaches the maximum speed To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal,
XTRONIC transmission models: move the in each gear. Do not exceed the speed limit of shift into the appropriate gear, then release the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, apply the any gear. Pay special attention when acceler- clutch slowly and smoothly.
parking brake and push or turn the ignition ating or when shifting into a lower gear on
switch to the OFF position. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the
slippery surfaces. Sudden acceleration or
clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the
9. Rotate the steering wheel left to lock the steering down shifting could cause the wheels to skid
clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the trans-
wheel. and result in loss of control.
mission is shifted, a grating noise may be heard.
This could result in damage to the transmission.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift through the
gears in sequence according to the vehicle speed.

Starting and driving 5-17


Reverse gear: DRIVING WITH XTRONIC
To reverse with 6speed manual transmission, pro- TRANSMISSION (CVT)
ceed as follows:
CAUTION
1) Stop the vehicle.
The cold engine idle speed is high, so use
2) Move the shift lever into the N (Neutral) position. caution when shifting into a forward or re-
verse gear before the engine has warmed up.
3) Pull and hold the shift lever ring j
1 up.
4) Move the shift lever into the R (Reverse) posi- Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
is stopped. This could cause unexpected ve-
tion.
NSD496 hicle movement.
5) Release the shift lever ring and safely drive the
vehicle backwards. Driving precautions
Shift lever indicator (where fitted):
The shift lever indicator j
A located in the lower part The shift lever ring returns to its original position Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while
the vehicle is moving, this could result in dam-
of the vehicle information display can help to im- when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)
age to the transmission.
prove the level of environmentally friendly driving. position.

Following the shift lever indicator by changing to a When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N
(Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with
higher (or lower) gear whenever the UP (or DOWN) either the NissanConnect monitor (where fitted) or
the transmission in the N position may cause
arrow is displayed may improve fuel economy the ultrasonic parking sensor (where fitted) will be
serious damage to the transmission.
activated. For details, see Rear-view monitor
An UP arrow suggests shifting to a higher gear, a
down arrow suggests shifting to a lower gear.
(where fitted) or Around View Monitor (where Start the engine in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
fitted) in the 4. Display screen, heater and air con- position. The engine will not start in any other
However, the driver remains responsible for decid- ditioner, and audio system section or Ultrasonic shift lever position. If it does, have your ve-
ing the most suitable gear according to actual ve- Parking Sensors (where fitted) later in this section. hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
hicle, road and traffic conditions. For details, see Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where workshop.
fitted) later in this section.
NOTE Do not depress the accelerator pedal while
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-
No arrow is displayed is some circumstances in- or 1st. Shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch verse), D (Drive) or Manual shift modes posi-
cluding: pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift tion. Always depress the brake pedal until
The actual gear matches recommended gear into R (Reverse) or 1st. shifting is completed.

The vehicle speed is approx. 0 km/h

5-18 Starting and driving


On an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot- is stopped, this could cause unexpected ve-
brake should be used for this purpose, in or- hicle movement [if the shift lever is in the R
der to hold the vehicle in place and to prevent (Reverse), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode po-
overheating of the transmission. sition] or damage the engine [if the shift lever
is in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position].
Shift into the N (Neutral) position and apply
the parking brake when at a standstill for WARM THE ENGINE UP
longer than a short waiting period.
Due to the higher idle speeds when the en-
Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting gine is cold, extra caution must be taken when
NSD499
from the N (Neutral) position to any driving shifting the shift lever into the driving position
position. immediately after starting the engine.
CAUTION (when starting the vehicle): PARKING THE VEHICLE Shifting
DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL Depress the footbrake pedal and, once the j
A LHD models
When the engine is running, shifting the shift vehicle stops, move the shift lever into the P j
B RHD models
lever into the R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual (Park) position, apply the parking brake and
release the footbrake pedal. To move the shift lever:
shift mode position without depressing the
brake pedal causes the vehicle to move Push the button while depressing the
Starting the vehicle m brake pedal.
slowly. Be sure the brake pedal is fully de-
pressed and the vehicle is stopped, before 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-
Push the button to shift.
shifting the shift lever. brake pedal before shifting the shift lever from P m
(Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or Manual shift
BE AWARE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSITION mode. m
Just move the shift lever.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the desired 2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and push
position. Use the D (Drive), or Manual shift Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse).
the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear. All other positions can be selected without pushing
mode to move forwards and the R (Reverse)
to move backwards. Release the parking 3. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then the button.
brake and the footbrake pedal, then depress gradually start the vehicle in motion by pressing
the accelerator pedal to start the vehicle in the accelerator pedal.
motion and merge with traffic (avoid abrupt The XTRONIC transmission is designed so that the
starting and spinning the wheels). footbrake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition
switch is ON.

Starting and driving 5-19


P (Park): D (Drive): Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when Use this position for all normal forward driving. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th
starting the engine. Always make sure that the ve-
hicle is completely stopped before moving the shift When shifting up, move the shift lever to the +
(up) side. (Shifts to higher range).
lever into the P (Park) position. For maximum safety,
the footbrake pedal must be depressed before mov- When shifting down, move the shift lever to the
ing the shift lever into the P (Park) position. Use this (down) side. (Shifts to lower range).
position together with the parking brake. When park-
ing on a hill, first depress the footbrake pedal, apply Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side
twice will shift the ranges in succession.
the parking brake and then shift into the P (Park)
position. Use the 1st position when driving slowly on steep
hills, slow driving through deep snow, sand or
R (Reverse): NSD498
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
CAUTION downhill grades.
Shift lever indicator:
Shift into this position only after the vehicle has Use the 2nd, 3rd or 4th position when driving
completely stopped. The shift lever indicator j
A located in the lower part steep hills or for engine braking on steep down-
Use this position to reverse the vehicle. of the vehicle information display shows the current hill grades.
position of the transmission.
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, Use the 5th position for driving up or down long
either the NissanConnect monitor (where fitted) or It shows the P,R,N,D modes when the transmission slopes.
is in auto mode or the shift position when the trans-
the ultrasonic parking sensor (where fitted) will be
activated. For details, see Rear-view monitor mission is in manual mode. Use the 6th position for all normal forward driv-
ing. However, you need to shift down the gears
(where fitted) or Around View Monitor (where Ds (Drive Sport) and Manual shift mode when accelerating or passing another vehicle.
fitted) in the 4. Display screen, heater and air con-
ditioner, and audio system section or Ultrasonic When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to the When cancelling manual shift mode, return the
Parking Sensors (where fitted) later in this section. manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmis-
driving, the transmission enters Ds (Drive Sport) sion returns to the normal driving mode.
N (Neutral): mode. Ds mode will provide improved acceleration
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The response and engine braking. Moving the shift lever
In manual shift mode, the transmission may
not shift to the selected gear under certain
engine can be started in this position. You may shift forwards and backwards allows manual shifting. circumstances. This helps maintain driving
to N and restart a stalled engine while driving the performance and reduces the chance of ve-
In manual shift mode, the selected gear is displayed
vehicle. hicle damage or loss of control.
on the position indicator in the combination meter.

5-20 Starting and driving


If the engine is revving up to a hazardous If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift
WARNING
speed in manual shift mode, the transmission lever may not move from the P (Park) position even
may shift up automatically. When the vehicle with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
speed decreases, the transmission automati- button pushed. (Park) position while the engine is running and
cally shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may
To move the shift lever, perform the following proce-
the vehicle comes to a stop. not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
dure:
an accident injuring yourself and others.
Accelerator downshift In the D (Drive) 1. Models with Intelligent Key system:
and Ds (Drive Sport) position High fluid temperature protection mode
Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK
For rapid passing or driving uphill, fully depress the position. This transmission has a high fluid temperature pro-
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the trans- tection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too
mission down into a lower gear, depending on the Models without Intelligent Key system: high (for example, when climbing steep grades in
vehicle speed. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position, high temperature with heavy loads, such as when
and remove the key if it is inserted. towing a trailer), engine power and, under some
conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-
2. Apply the parking brake. matically to reduce the chance of transmission dam-
3. Push down the shift lock release button j
A . Use age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the ac-
a suitable tool. celerator pedal, but engine and vehicle speed may
be limited.
4. Push and hold the shift lever button and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while Fail-safe
holding down the shift lock release button.
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the vehicle
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to un- speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the
NSD502
lock the steering wheel. The vehicle may be moved chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can
to the desired location. be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the
Shift lock release engine power may be limited. Have a NISSAN dealer
For models with Intelligent Key system: If the battery
or qualified workshop check and repair the trans-
j
1 LHD models is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot
mission.
be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steer-
j
2 RHD models ing wheel locked.
j
A Shift lock release button If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)
position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop check the XTRONIC system as soon as pos-
sible.

Starting and driving 5-21


STOP/START SYSTEM
(where fitted)

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent un- NORMAL OPERATION
such as excessive wheel spinning and subse- necessary fuel consumption, exhaust emissions,
quent hard braking, the Fail-safe system may be and noise during a journey:
activated. This will occur even if all electrical cir-
cuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn When you stop the vehicle with the brake pedal
depressed (XTRONIC transmission) or with the
the ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 sec-
shift lever in N (Neutral) and clutch pedal re-
onds. Then turn the key back to the ON position.
leased (MT), the engine is turned off automati-
The vehicle should return to its normal operating
cally.
condition. If it does not return to its normal oper-
ating condition have your NISSAN dealer or quali- When you release the brake pedal (XTRONIC
fied workshop check the transmission and have transmission) or push the clutch pedal (MT), the
the transmission repaired by a NISSAN dealer or engine is automatically turned on. NSD491

qualified workshop, if necessary. CAUTION


The Stop/Start System has stopped the engine and
WARNING At the end of the journey the engine must be will automatically restart the engine. The Stop/Start
stopped and ignition turned OFF. Lock the ve- symbol is shown in the vehicle information display.
When the fail safe operation occurs, the vehicle hicle as normal. Turning the ignition OFF will shut
speed may be lower than other traffic, which down all electrical systems. Failure to do this may NOTE
could increase the chance of a collision. Be es- result in a flat battery.
pecially careful when driving. If necessary, drive The Stop/Start System will not activate under
to the side of the road at a safe place and away the following conditions:
from traffic, to allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have the transmission re-
When the engine is kept idling without any driv-
ing after the engine is turned on.
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop,
if necessary. When the engine coolant temperature is low.
When the battery capacity is low.
When the battery temperature is low or extremely
high.
When the vehicle is moved.
When the vacuum in the brake servo decreases.
When the engine bonnet is opened with the en-
gine running.

5-22 Starting and driving


When the engine is turned on with the engine When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes higher brake pedal (XTRONIC transmission models) or
bonnet open. than 2000 m (6562 ft) (MT models). without depressing the clutch pedal (MT models)
while the Stop/Start System is activated under
When the drivers seat belt is not fastened. When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes higher
the following conditions:
than 1500m (4922 ft) (R9M engine in combina-
When the drivers door is open.
tion with XTRONIC transmission models). When the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
When the steering wheel is operated.
NOTE
pushed.
When the Stop/Start System indicator blinks at
It may take some time until the Stop/Start Sys-
When the fan speed control dial is in any posi-
a low speed. tion other than OFF (0) while the air flow con-
tem activates under the following conditions: trol dial is in the front defogger position (manual
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
When the battery is discharged. air conditioner).
(XTRONIC transmission models).
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi- When the outside temperature is low. When the front defogger switch is set to ON
(automatic air conditioner).
tion. When the battery is replaced or the battery ter-
When the fan speed control dial is in any posi- minal is disconnected for extended periods and When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
tion other than OFF (0) while the air flow con- then reconnected. (XTRONIC transmission models)
trol dial is in the front defogger position (manual NOTE When the steering wheel is operated. (XTRONIC
air conditioner). transmission models)
The engine will not restart even if the brake pedal
When the front defogger switch is on (automatic is released (XTRONIC transmission ) or clutch When the battery capacity is low.
air conditioner). pedal is pressed (MT) while the Stop/Start Sys-
tem is activated under the following condition:
When the power consumption is large.
When the Stop/Start System OFF switch is
When the brake pedal is released on sloping
turned on. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) position roads and the vehicle is moved.
When the electric power steering warning light, (XTRONIC transmission models).
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning When the engine bonnet is opened.
When the force to the brake pedal is reduced
while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or N (Neu-
light, or the Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP) warning light illuminates. When the driver seat belt is unfastened and the tral) position. (XTRONIC transmission models)
drivers door is opened (MT models).
When the brake pedal is not fully depressed When the shift lever is placed in the L (Low), D
(XTRONIC transmission models). When the gear shift lever is not in the Neutral (Drive) or R (Reverse) position from the N or P
position. (MT models) position. (XTRONIC transmission models)
When stopping the vehicle on steep sloping
NOTE When the vacuum of the brake servo is insuffi-
roads (XTRONIC transmission models).
cient as a result of depressing the brake pedal
When the power consumption is large. The engine will restart without releasing the several times.

Starting and driving 5-23


When the drivers seat belt is released or the
drivers door is open. (XTRONIC transmission
models) NOTE
The message can be
Automatic engine restart

m m
Use this system while waiting at stoplight, etc. When cleared by pressing the
is possible whenever the
the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time, turn steering wheel j i button,
Stop/Start System
off the engine. restarting the engine, or
symbol is illuminated at
When the engine bonnet is opened with the Stop/ turning the ignition OFF.
the bottom of the
Start System on, the engine will be in the normal display.
stopped state with the buzzer sounding. In this case,
restart the engine with the ignition switch. Whilst the engine remains stopped the vehicle infor-
When the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start Sys- mation display shows the accumulated quantity (es-
PRECAUTIONS
tem, heating, cooling and dehumidifying functions timate) of carbon dioxide exhaust emissions (where The following message is displayed when there may
will be deactivated. To avoid the air conditioning fitted) prevented by the Stop/Start System. be something wrong with the Stop/Start System.
functions from being deactivated, turn off the Stop/ You are advised to have the system checked by a
Start System by pressing the Stop/Start System NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
OFF switch. The [CO2 Saved] can
The message can be
The Stop/Start System is always engaged at the be reset in the Settings

m
cleared by pressing the
start of a journey (once the engine has been started). menu; see Vehicle
steering wheel ENTER
The engine is automatically stopped and restarted information display in
button
during the journey if conditions are suitable the 2. Instruments and

m
When the engine is stopped the following informa- controls section.
NOTE
tion is displayed for a few seconds. The Stop/Start System
See Vehicle information display in the 2. Instru- symbol at the bottom of
ments and controls section for information about When automatic restart is not possible the following the display flashes whilst
the display. information is displayed. The engine must be started the fault condition
by turning the ignition switch. remains.

5-24 Starting and driving


STOP/START SYSTEM OFF SWITCH When the Stop/Start System is disengaged af- ENVIRONMENTAL SAVINGS
ter the engine has been automatically stopped
by the Stop/Start System, the engine will imme- The vehicle information display keeps a record of
diately restart if suitable conditions are present the CO2 savings that can be viewed via the [Set-
as described under NORMAL OPERATION. tings] menu.
The engine will then be prevented from automati- See Vehicle information display in the 2. Instru-
cally stopping during the same journey. ments and controls section for information about
the display.
Whenever the Stop/Start System is disengaged
the indicator light on the Stop/Start System OFF Information that can be displayed includes:
switch illuminates. In this condition the Stop/
NSD492
Start System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel [Trip Saving]

Right hand drive (RHD)


consumption, exhaust emissions, or noise dur- Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions prevented
ing your journey. since last reset.
NOTE NOTE
The following messages may be displayed for a The [Trip Saving] value is the same informa-
few seconds in the vehicle information display tion that is displayed when the engine is auto-
when the Stop/Start System OFF switch is matically stopped by the Stop/Start System.
pressed.
Stop/Start System Stop/Start System
[Total Saving]

disengaged re-engaged Estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre-


vented.
NSD493 Time that the engine has been stopped by
Left hand drive (LHD) the Stop/Start System.

m m
The system can be temporarily disengaged by NOTE
pressing the Stop/Start System OFF switch. Press-
ing the button a second time will re-engage the The [Total Saving] values cannot be reset
Stop/Start System. and show accumulated Stop/Start System
information since the vehicle was built.
When the Stop/Start System is disengaged
whilst the engine is running, the engine is pre-
vented from automatically stopping. More information about the Stop/Start System can
be checked using the [Settings] menu (see Instru-
ments and Controls)

Starting and driving 5-25


FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(where fitted)

AUTO: Switch the control switch to the neutral


(AUTO) position and the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
AUTO indicator light on the combination meter
illuminates.
2WD: Switch the control switch to the 2WD posi-
tion.
LOCK: When the control is switched to the LOCK
position, it springs back to the AUTO position when
released. The 4WD LOCK mode indicator light
NSD494 illuminates on the combination meter, to show
Right hand drive (RHD) LOCK mode is engaged. To disengage LOCK
mode, switch the control switch again to the LOCK
position and release. The 4WD LOCK mode indica-
tor light will go out.

NSD495
Left hand drive (LHD)

The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system is used to


select 2WD, AUTO, or LOCK depending on the
driving conditions.
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) system controls the
coupling operation. Switch the control switch (see
illustration) to select each mode: 2WD, AUTO or
LOCK depending on the driving conditions.

5-26 Starting and driving


4WD MODE OPERATIONS CAUTION
Depending on the driving conditions, the 4WD
4WD mode
mode may automatically change from 2WD to
indicator light
4WD Mode Wheels driven Driving conditions 4WD even when the 2WD mode is selected.
(m ,m) If this occurs while driving, the 4WD mode indi-
Front wheels- cator light will not illuminate.
The wheel drive mode is in Do not start the engine while in the 2WD, AUTO,
2WD Goes off For driving on dry, paved roads
2WD when driving on a normal or LOCK mode:
road*1
Distribution of torque to the When on free-roller or jacking the front tyres
front and rear wheels changes with the rear tyres on the ground.
automatically, depending on
When towing with the rear tyres raised from
AUTO road conditions encountered
[ratio; 100:0 (2WD) 50:50
(4WD)]. This results in
improved driving stability
m For driving on paved or slippery roads
the ground.
4WD SHIFT TIPS
If the 4WD mode control is operated while cor-
LOCK Four wheels*2 For driving on rough roads nering, accelerating or decelerating, or if the ig-
m /m nition is turned OFF while in the AUTO or LOCK
*1
The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving condition. The 4WD mode indi- position you may feel a jolt - this is normal.

*2
cator light does not illuminate.
The oil temperature of power train parts will in-
LOCK mode changes to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle is sharply accelerated or when the vehicle speed crease if the vehicle is continuously operated
is over approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH). The 4WD LOCK indicator light goes off. Turning off the ignition automatically under conditions where the difference in rotation
cancels LOCK mode. between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel
slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough
roads through sand or mud, or when freeing a
stuck vehicle. In these cases, the message [4WD
High Temp. Stop Vehicle] will appear in the ve-
hicle information display and the 4WD mode
changes to the 2WD condition to protect the
power train parts. If you stop the vehicle, with

Starting and driving 5-27


the engine idling, and wait until the warning mes- engine is running, this light will illuminate simul- DRIVING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
sage is no longer displayed, the 4WD mode re- taneously along with the 4WD mode indicator SAFELY
turns to the AUTO mode. light (AUTO).
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-
Braking distance in 4WD mode is the same as in 4WD mode indicator light (AUTO): road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or
2WD mode. mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure
This light comes on when the ignition switch is
Even if the mode automatically changes to AUTO turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1 use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
mode, when driving in the LOCK mode, the indi- second. If the engine is running, this light will illu- Remember that Two-Wheel drive (2WD) models are
cator light stays in the LOCK mode. minate when selecting AUTO mode. less capable than Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models
CAUTION The 4WD mode indicator light is located in the for rough road driving and extrication when stuck,
instrument panel. for example, in deep snow or mud.
Only use the 4WD mode control when driving
in a straight direction (to select 2WD, AUTO or The light should turn off within 1 second of the Please observe the following precautions:
LOCK). ignition switch being turned to the ON position.
Drive carefully when off-road and avoid danger-
Do not use the 4WD mode control when turn- While the engine is running, the 4WD mode indi- ous areas. Always wear seat belts to help keep
ing or reversing. cator light will display the position selected by you and your passengers in position when driv-
the 4WD mode control. ing over rough terrain.
Do not use the 4WD mode control with the
front wheels spinning (to select 2WD, AUTO, NOTE Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive
or LOCK). either straight up or straight down the slope. Off-
The 4WD mode indicator light may blink while road vehicles can tip over sideways much more
Be especially careful when starting or driving shifting from one drive mode to another. Once easily than they can forwards or backwards.
on slippery surfaces with the 4WD mode set shifting is completed, the 4WD mode indicator
to AUTO. light will come on. If the indicator light does not Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you
come on immediately, make sure that the area drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down
Never drive on dry hard surface roads in the
around the vehicle is safe and free from ob- them, you may not be able to control your speed.
LOCK position as this will overload the power If you drive across them, you may roll over.
train and may cause serious malfunctions. stacles. Drive the vehicle straight (DO NOT ac-

4WD MODE INDICATOR LIGHTS


celerate, decelerate or reverse), then turn the
4WD mode control.
Do not shift gears when driving on downhill
grades as this could cause loss of control of the
4WD mode indicator light (LOCK): If the 4WD warning lights comes on, the 4WD indi- vehicle.
This light comes on when the ignition switch is cator light(s) will go out. Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1 top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that
second. When selecting LOCK mode while the could cause an accident.

5-28 Starting and driving


If the engine of the vehicle stalls or you cannot If at all possible, avoid sharp turning manoeuvres, quent maintenance may be required. For details,
make it to the top of a steep grade, never at- particularly at high speeds. Your 4WD vehicle refer to the separately provided Warranty Infor-
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or has a higher centre of gravity than a 2WD ve- mation and Maintenance Booklet.
roll over. Always drive backwards and straight hicle and can tip over more easily. The vehicle is
down in R (reverse) gear. not designed for cornering at the same speeds Rinse the underside of the vehicle with fresh
water after driving through mud or sand. Re-
as conventional 2WD models any more than low
Never drive backwards with the shift lever in N move any brush or sticks that are trapped.
sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
(Neutral) and/or with the clutch depressed and
using the brake as this could result in loss of
rily under off-road conditions. Failure to operate Install the same size of winter tyres on all four (4)
this vehicle correctly could result in loss of con- wheels (such as studless tyres) or install snow
control.
trol and/or a rollover accident. chains to the front wheels when driving on slip-
Heavy braking down a hill could cause your
Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
pery roads (e.g. after a snowfall) and drive care-
brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of fully using 4WD.
wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel
control and an accident. Apply the brakes lightly
and use a low gear to control your vehicle speed.
could jerk and injure your hands. Instead, drive Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you
with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of get out of the vehicle and it rolls forwards, back-
Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when the rim. wards or sideways, you could be injured.
driving over rough terrain. Properly secure it so
that it will not be thrown forwards and cause Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the
driver and all passengers have their seat belts
injury to you or your passengers.
fastened.
To avoid raising the centre of gravity excessively,
Always drive with the floor mats in place as the
do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack/
floor may become very hot. Particular care
gear bin (where fitted) and evenly distribute the
should be taken if you are barefoot.
load. Secure heavy loads in the luggage area as
far forwards and as low as possible. Do not equip Lower your speed when encountering strong
the vehicle with tyres larger than specified. This crosswinds. With its higher centre of gravity your
could cause your vehicle to roll over. NISSAN is more affected by gusty side winds.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
Accelerating quickly, sharp steering manoeuvres
or sudden braking may cause loss of control. Be sure to check the brakes immediately after
driving in mud or water as specified in Wet
Do not drive beyond the performance of the
brakes later in this section.
tyres, even with 4WD. Sudden acceleration,
steering or braking may result in loss of control Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud
and could cause the vehicle to become stuck. or water as deep as the wheel hub, more fre-

Starting and driving 5-29


BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
SYSTEM (where fitted)

While driving, the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sys- When strong light enters the camera unit. BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
tem helps alert the driver to the presence of other (for example, light directly shines on the
vehicles in adjacent lanes. front or rear of the vehicle at sunrise or
sunset.)
When ambient brightness changes sud-
denly. (for example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or passes under a
bridge.)
If the camera lens is excessively dirty, the au-
tomatic washer may not be able to completely
clean the lens. This could result in the camera NAA1425

not detecting vehicles or lane markers. Blind Spot Indicator light on the inside of the mirrors
NAA1426
Excessive noise (for example, audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
The BSW system uses the rear view monitor cam- with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
era unit j
1.

WARNING
The BSW system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure and is not designed
to prevent contact with vehicles or objects.
When driving, always use the side and rear NAA1427
mirrors and always turn your head and look in BSW light in the vehicle information display
the direction you will move to ensure it is safe
to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW The BSW system operates above approximately 32
system. km/h (20 MPH).
The BSW light is shown in the vehicle information
The camera units may not function properly display if the Blind Spot Warning system is active.
under the following conditions: To switch the system on or off, see the description
When towing a trailer. later in this section.
When the camera unit detects a vehicle in the de-
tection zone, the Blind Spot Indicator light located in
the front corner of the door window (by the outside

5-30 Starting and driving


mirrors) will illuminate. If the turn signal is then acti- signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
vated, the system chimes (twice) and the Blind spot after the driver activates the turn signal, then only (See BSW driving situations later in this
indicator light will start flashing bright orange to alert the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes and no chime section.)
you to the presence of vehicle(s) in the adjacent sounds. (See BSW driving situations later in this
A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rap-
lane. section.)
idly. (See BSW driving situations later in
The Blind spot indicator light continues to flash until Turning the BSW system on or off this section.)
the detected vehicle(s) leave the detection zone.
Turning the BSW system on or off is done using the A vehicle that merges or changes lanes
Detection zone [Settings] menu in the vehicle information display. rapidly directly next to your vehicle.
For details. see Vehicle information display in the
2. Instruments and controls section.
The camera unit may not be able to detect
properly when your vehicle travels beside the
In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assistance] middle section of a vehicle with long wheel-
key. Then select [Driving Aids]. Select [Blind Spot base (for example, trailer truck, semi-trailer,
Warning] key by pressing <ENTER>. A tick mark tractor).
next to [Blind Spot Warning] indicates that the sys-
tem is turned on. The camera detection zone is designed based
on a standard lane width. When driving in a
SYSTEM ON: wider lane, the camera unit may not detect
The BSW light on the vehicle information display will vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a
SSD1026Z light up. narrow lane, the camera unit may detect ve-
SYSTEM OFF: hicles driving two lanes away.
The camera unit can detect vehicles on either side
of your vehicle when part of another vehicle is within
The BSW light on the vehicle information display will The camera unit is designed to ignore most
turn off. stationary objects, however objects such as
the detection zone shown as illustrated. guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles
This detection zone typically starts from the outside WARNING may occasionally be detected. This is a nor-
mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 3 mal operating condition.
m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately The camera unit may not be able to detect
The camera unit may detect the reflected im-
3 m (10 ft) sideways. when certain objects are present such as:
age of vehicles or roadside objects that are
The brightness of the Blind Spot Indicator lights is Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. not actually in the detection zone, especially
adjusted automatically depending on the brightness Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height when the road is wet.
of the ambient light. vehicles, or high ground clearance
A chime sounds if the camera unit has already de- vehicles.
tected vehicles when the driver activates the turn Oncoming vehicles.

Starting and driving 5-31


BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if you over-
take a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection
Another vehicle approaching from zone for approximately 3 seconds.
behind
The camera unit may not detect slower moving ve-
hicles if they are passed quickly.

SSD1031Z

If the driver activates the turn signal, then the Blind


Spot Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound
SSD1026Z
twice.
SSD1034Z
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if a vehicle NOTE
enters the detection zone from behind in an adja- If the driver activates the turn signal before a
cent lane. If the driver activates the turn signal while another
vehicle enters the detection zone, the Blind Spot
vehicle is in the detection zone, then the Blind Spot
However, if the overtaking vehicle is travelling much Indicator light will flash but no chime will sound
Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.
faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not when the other vehicle is detected.
illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your BSW TEMPORARY DISABLED
Overtaking other vehicles
vehicle. STATUS
Under the following conditions the BSW system is
turned off temporarily and the BSW light will blink
when:
The back door is open.
The rear camera lens is dirty.
Rain, snow or dirt has adhered to the windscreen
in front of the multi-sensing camera unit.
SSD1033Z

5-32 Starting and driving


LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM (where fitted)

When the above conditions are corrected, the BSW BSW CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system alerts
system will resume automatically. the driver when the vehicle is travelling close to ei-
ther the left or the right of a travelling lane.
BSW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION
When dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the rear
camera, or the windscreen in front of the multi-sens-
ing camera, the BSW system will be turned off auto-
matically. The BSW light will blink.
Action to take:
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a safe
place, clean the camera unit and/or windscreen with NAA1429

a soft cloth. Then turn off and restart the engine.


The rear camera unit j
NSD522
BSW MALFUNCTION 1 for the BSW system is
located above the rear number plate and it has a
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatic washer and blower for cleaning the lens. The LDW system uses the multi-sensing front cam-
automatically and the BSW light (orange) will illumi- To maintain the proper operation of the BSW sys- era unit situated in front of the interior rear view mir-
nate. tem and prevent a system malfunction be sure to ror j
1.
Action to take: observe the following:
WARNING
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re- Always keep the camera unit clean. Be careful
start the engine. If the BSW light (orange) continues not to damage the nozzle of automatic washer The LDW system is only a warning device to
to illuminate, have the BSW system checked by a and blower. help inform the driver of a potential unin-
tended lane departure. It will not steer the
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Do not attach number plate accessories that
vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driv-
reflect light.
ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
Do not strike or damage the areas around the keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, and be
camera unit. in control of the vehicle at all times.
The camera units may not function properly
under the following conditions:
When towing a trailer.

Starting and driving 5-33


When strong light enters the camera unit. LDW SYSTEM OPERATION When you operate the lane change signal and
(for example, light directly shines on the change travelling lanes in the direction of the sig-
front or rear of the vehicle at sunrise or nal. (The LDW system will become operable
sunset.) again approximately 2 seconds after the lane
change signal is turned off.)
When ambient brightness changes sud-
denly. (for example, when the vehicle en- When the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
ters or exits a tunnel or passes under a mately 60 km/h (37 MPH).
bridge.)
Turning on or off the LDW system
Excessive noise (for example, audio system
Turning the LDW system on or of is done using the
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. NAA1438
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
For details, see Vehicle information display in the
2. Instruments and controls section.
In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assistance]
key.
Then select [Driving Aids]. Select [Lane Departure
Warning] key by pressing <ENTER>.
A tick mark next to [Lane Departure Warning] indi-
cates that the system is turned on.
SYSTEM ON:
The LDW light in the vehicle information display will
light up.
NAA1428
LDW light SYSTEM OFF:
The LDW system operates above approximately 60 The LDW light in the vehicle information display will
km/h (37 MPH). turn off.

When the vehicle approaches either the left or the WARNING


right of the travelling lane, the LDW system will
chime and the LDW light (orange) in the vehicle The camera unit may not be able to detect
information display will blink to alert the driver. properly under the following conditions:
The LDW system is not designed to operate under On roads where there are multiple parallel
the following conditions: lane markers; lane markers that are faded

5-34 Starting and driving


or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane ing camera unit. When this condition is corrected, MULTI-SENSING CAMERA UNIT
markers; non-standard lane markers; or the LDW system will resume automatically. MAINTENANCE
lane markers covered with water, dirt,
snow, etc. LDW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION
When dirt, rain, or snow accumulates on the wind-
On roads where the discontinued lane
screen in front of the multi-sensing camera unit, the
markers are still detectable.
LDW system will be turned off automatically. The
On roads where there are sharp curves. LDW light will blink.
On roads where there are sharply contrast- Action to take:
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, wa-
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a safe
ter, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining
place, clean the camera unit and/or windscreen with
after road repairs. (The LDW system could
a soft cloth. Then turn off and restart the engine. NSD523
detect these items as lane markers.)
On roads where the travelling lane merges LDW MALFUNCTION
The multi-sensing camera unit j 1 for the LDW sys-
or separates. When the LDW system malfunctions, it will be tem is located in front of the interior rear vier mirror.
When the vehicles travelling direction turned off automatically and the LDW light (orange) To maintain the proper operation of the LDW sys-
does not align with the lane marker. will illuminate. tem and prevent a system malfunction be sure to
When the road surface is very dark due to Action to take: observe the following:
weak ambient light or impaired lamps. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re- Always keep the windscreen clean.
start the engine. If the LDW light (orange) continues
When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
to illuminate, have the LDW system checked by a
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
windscreen in front of the LDW camera material) or install an accessory near the multi-
unit. NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. sensing lane camera unit.
When driving on a curved road, warning will Do not place reflective materials, such as white
be late on the outside of the curve. paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the
LDW TEMPORARY DISABLED multi-sensing camera units detection capability.
STATUS
The LDW system is turned off temporarily, and the
LDW light will blink when rain, snow, or dirt has
adhered to the windscreen in front of the multi-sens-

Starting and driving 5-35


CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)

Do not strike or damage the areas around the The cruise control system allows driving at constant When the cruise control system is on the speed lim-
multi-sensing lane camera unit. Do not touch the speeds without keeping your foot on the accelerator iter cannot be operated.
camera lens or remove the screw located on the pedal.
The cruise control system operation switches are
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due
located on the steering wheel (right side).
to an accident, contact a NISSAN dealer or WARNING
qualified workshop. The cruise control system operating condition is
The cruise control system ONLY maintains a shown in the vehicle information display.
constant vehicle speed, it does not replace
the driver. PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
Always observe the posted speed limits and
do not set the speed above them. The cruise control system will be automatically
cancelled when there is a malfunction. Have the
Do not use the cruise control system when
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
driving under the following conditions. Doing
so could cause a loss of vehicle control and fied workshop.
result in an accident. To properly set the cruise control system, per-
form the steps as described in Setting a cruis-
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
ing speed later in this section.
at a constant speed
When driving in heavy traffic
When driving in traffic that varies speed
When driving in windy areas
When driving on winding or hilly roads
When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice,
etc.) roads
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into
N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal
when the cruise control is set. Should this occur,
depress the clutch pedal and turn the cruise con-
trol main switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.

5-36 Starting and driving


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (For details, see Speed limiter (where fitted) If the vehicle speed is less than the minimum set
OPERATIONS later in this section) (where fitted) speed, it will not be possible to set the cruise
control system.
Changing a cruising speed
Use any one of the following methods to change the
cruising speed.
Slow the vehicle as normal using the footbrake
pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
speed, push and release the SET switch j B
NAA1431 downwards.
NAA1385
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
Models with speed limiter (where fitted)
top of the vehicle information display.
j4 Cruise control symbol
j5 Set speed value
Press the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
Turning the cruise control system on speed, push and release the SET switch j B
downwards.
Push the cruise control main switch j2 . The cruise The new set speed value will be displayed in the
control symbol j4 appears together with the last set top of the vehicle information display.
speed value (or ) j 5 in the top of the vehicle
information display. Push and release the RES (resume) j A switch
upwards to increase or the SET switch j B down-
Setting a cruising speed wards to decrease the set speed in steps of 1
NAA1386
1. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed. km/h (1 MPH).
Models without speed limiter
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
j
1 CANCEL switch 2. Push the SET switch j
B downwards and release top of the vehicle information display.
it.
j
A RES/+ (Resume) switch Push and hold the RES (resume) j A switch up-
3. The cruise control symbol j 4 appears together wards or the SET switch j B downwards. The
j
B SET/ switch with the set speed value (desired cruising speed) vehicle speed will increase or decrease to the
j
2 Cruise control main ON/OFF switch j5 in the top of the vehicle information display. new set speed.
The new set speed value will be displayed in the
j
3 Speed limiter main ON/OFF switch 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
top of the vehicle information display.
The vehicle will maintain the set speed.

Starting and driving 5-37


SPEED LIMITER (where fitted)

Passing another vehicle cruising speed. The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve-
Pressing the CANCEL switch prevents resuming hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is acti-
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After to the previous cruising speed. vated, you can perform normal braking and accel-
releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re- eration, but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed.
turn to the previously set speed. Turn the cruise control system off
The set speed value j 5 will flash until the vehicle The cruise control system will be turned off when
When the vehicle reaches the set speed limit or if
returns to the previously set speed. the set speed limit is lower than the actual vehicle
one of the following operations is performed: speed, the accelerator pedal will not work until the
Cancelling the cruise control system Push the cruise control main ON/OFF switch vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit.
To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL j2 . The cruise control symbol j 4 and the set When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
switch j
1. speed value j 5 will turn off in the combination speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
The cruise control symbol j 4 and the set speed meter display after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
value j
5 disappear from the top of the vehicle infor-
Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch tion is not detected.
mation display. j 3 . The cruise control system information in the When the speed limiter is on the cruise control sys-
The cruise control system will also be cancelled combination meter will be replaced with the
automatically by any of the following: tem cannot be operated.
speed limiter information. For details see Speed
Pressing the footbrake pedal. limiter (where fitted) later in this section.
WARNING
Pressing the clutch pedal. When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is
The speed limiter will not automatically brake
turned to the off position.
Shifting the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. the vehicle to the set speed limit.
First depress clutch pedal Turning off the cruise control system will erase
the cruise control system memory. Always observe posted speed limits. Do not
If the vehicle slows down more than approxi- set the speed above them.
mately 12 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed.
Always confirm the setting status of the speed
Resuming a previous cruising speed limiter in the vehicle information display.
If the cruising speed has been cancelled, the last When the speed limiter is set, avoid hard ac-
set speed value will be stored in the cruise control celeration to reach the set limit to ensure that
system memory. This cruising speed can be reacti- the system can limit the speed of the vehicle
vated by pressing the RES (Resume) switch j A correctly.
upwards.
If the vehicle speed is less than a minimum set
speed, it will not be possible to resume to the

5-38 Starting and driving


When additional floor mats are used, be sure When the speed limit is set, the speed limiter sym-
that they are correctly secured and that they bol j 4 and the set speed value j5 will illuminate in
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal. the vehicle information display. The limiter symbol
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent will turn green.
proper operation of the speed limiter.
Changing a speed limit
The speed limiter operation switches are located on
Use either of the following operations to change an
the steering wheel (right hand side).
active speed limit:
The speed limiter operating condition is shown on
Push and release the RES (Resume) switch j A
the top of vehicle information display. For details,
NAA1430 upwards or SET switch j B downwards. Each
see Vehicle information display in the 2. Instru-
time you do this, the set speed will increase or
ments and controls section.
decrease by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS j
4 Speed limiter symbol
Push and hold the RES (Resume) switch j A
j
5 Set speed value upwards or SET switch j B downwards. The set
Turning the speed limiter on speed will increase or decrease to the next mul-
tiple of 5 km/h (5 MPH) and then in steps of 5
The speed limiter can be switched on after engine km/h (5 MPH).
start or when driving.
The new set speed limit value j 5 will be displayed
Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch j
3. in the vehicle information display.
The speed limiter symbol j 4 and the set speed value When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
j5 will illuminate in the vehicle information display. speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
NAA1385 Setting speed limit after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
tion is not detected.
Push the SET switch j
B (downwards).
j
1 CANCEL switch
Depending on the model:
Cancelling a speed limit
j
A RES + (Resume) switch To cancel a set speed limit, push the CANCEL
The speed limit will be set at the current speed. switch j1 . The speed limiter symbol j 4 and the set
j
B SET (Set) switch
When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), the speed value j 5 in the vehicle information display will
j
2 Cruise control main ON/OFF switch. (For speed limiter will be set to the minimum possible be turned off.
details, see Cruise control (where fitted) set speed of 30 km/h (20 MPH). It is also possible to override the speed limiter by
earlier in this section)
Set the speed limiter while driving over 30 km/h fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
j
3 Speed limiter main ON/OFF switch (20 MPH). resistance point.

Starting and driving 5-39


FORWARD EMERGENCY
BRAKING SYSTEM (where fitted)

Turning the speed limiter off The forward emergency braking system can assist
WARNING the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision
The speed limiter system will be turned off when
The vehicle may accelerate when the speed
one of the following operations is performed:
with the vehicle ahead in the travelling lane.
limiter cancels.
When additional floor mats are used, be sure Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch
j3 . The speed limiter symbol j 4 and the set
that they are correctly secured and that they
speed value j 5 in the vehicle information display
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.